iv/linux
1
0
Fork 0
Code Issues Pull Requests Actions Packages Projects Releases Wiki Activity

Merge tag 'v4.9-rc1' into x86/urgent, to pick up updates

Browse Source 
Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@kernel.org>
This commit is contained in:
Ingo Molnar
2016-10-16 11:31:39 +02:00
parent 23446cb66c 1001354ca3
commit 1d33369db2
9729 changed files with 584514 additions and 335096 deletions
Download Patch File Download Diff File Expand all files Collapse all files

2
.gitattributes vendored Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
*.c diff=cpp
*.h diff=cpp

4
.mailmap
View File

@ -75,6 +75,8 @@ Jean Tourrilhes <jt@hpl.hp.com>
Jeff Garzik <jgarzik@pretzel.yyz.us>
Jens Axboe <axboe@suse.de>
Jens Osterkamp <Jens.Osterkamp@de.ibm.com>
Johan Hovold <johan@kernel.org> <jhovold@gmail.com>
Johan Hovold <johan@kernel.org> <johan@hovoldconsulting.com>
John Paul Adrian Glaubitz <glaubitz@physik.fu-berlin.de>
John Stultz <johnstul@us.ibm.com>
<josh@joshtriplett.org> <josh@freedesktop.org>
@ -125,6 +127,7 @@ Peter Oruba <peter@oruba.de>
Peter Oruba <peter.oruba@amd.com>
Pratyush Anand <pratyush.anand@gmail.com> <pratyush.anand@st.com>
Praveen BP <praveenbp@ti.com>
Qais Yousef <qsyousef@gmail.com> <qais.yousef@imgtec.com>
Rajesh Shah <rajesh.shah@intel.com>
Ralf Baechle <ralf@linux-mips.org>
Ralf Wildenhues <Ralf.Wildenhues@gmx.de>
@ -160,6 +163,7 @@ Valdis Kletnieks <Valdis.Kletnieks@vt.edu>
Viresh Kumar <vireshk@kernel.org> <viresh.kumar@st.com>
Viresh Kumar <vireshk@kernel.org> <viresh.linux@gmail.com>
Viresh Kumar <vireshk@kernel.org> <viresh.kumar2@arm.com>
Vlad Dogaru <ddvlad@gmail.com> <vlad.dogaru@intel.com>
Vladimir Davydov <vdavydov.dev@gmail.com> <vdavydov@virtuozzo.com>
Vladimir Davydov <vdavydov.dev@gmail.com> <vdavydov@parallels.com>
Takashi YOSHII <takashi.yoshii.zj@renesas.com>

25
CREDITS
View File

@ -1090,6 +1090,10 @@ S: 6350 Stoneridge Mall Road
S: Pleasanton, CA 94588
S: USA
N: Dmitry Eremin-Solenikov
E: dbaryshkov@gmail.com
D: Power Supply Maintainer from v3.14 - v3.15
N: Doug Evans
E: dje@cygnus.com
D: Wrote Xenix FS (part of standard kernel since 0.99.15)
@ -1944,6 +1948,11 @@ E: kraxel@bytesex.org
E: kraxel@suse.de
D: video4linux, bttv, vesafb, some scsi, misc fixes
N: Hans J. Koch
D: USERSPACE I/O, MAX6650
D: Hans passed away in June 2016, and will be greatly missed.
W: https://lwn.net/Articles/691000/
N: Harald Koenig
E: koenig@tat.physik.uni-tuebingen.de
D: XFree86 (S3), DCF77, some kernel hacks and fixes
@ -2287,11 +2296,11 @@ D: Initial implementation of VC's, pty's and select()
N: Pavel Machek
E: pavel@ucw.cz
D: Softcursor for vga, hypertech cdrom support, vcsa bugfix, nbd
P: 4096R/92DFCE96 4FA7 9EEF FCD4 C44F C585 B8C7 C060 2241 92DF CE96
D: Softcursor for vga, hypertech cdrom support, vcsa bugfix, nbd,
D: sun4/330 port, capabilities for elf, speedup for rm on ext2, USB,
D: work on suspend-to-ram/disk, killing duplicates from ioctl32
S: Volkova 1131
S: 198 00 Praha 9
D: work on suspend-to-ram/disk, killing duplicates from ioctl32,
D: Altera SoCFPGA and Nokia N900 support.
S: Czech Republic
N: Paul Mackerras
@ -3518,6 +3527,10 @@ S: 145 Howard St.
S: Northborough, MA 01532
S: USA
N: Doug Thompson
E: dougthompson@xmission.com
D: EDAC
N: Tommy Thorn
E: Tommy.Thorn@irisa.fr
W: http://www.irisa.fr/prive/thorn/index.html
@ -3654,6 +3667,10 @@ S: Obere Heerbergstrasse 17
S: 97078 Wuerzburg
S: Germany
N: Jason Uhlenkott
E: juhlenko@akamai.com
D: I3000 EDAC driver
N: Greg Ungerer
E: gerg@snapgear.com
D: uClinux kernel hacker

3
Documentation/00-INDEX
View File

@ -46,7 +46,8 @@ IRQ.txt
Intel-IOMMU.txt
- basic info on the Intel IOMMU virtualization support.
Makefile
- some files in Documentation dir are actually sample code to build
- This file does nothing. Removing it breaks make htmldocs and
make distclean.
ManagementStyle
- how to (attempt to) manage kernel hackers.
RCU/

345
Documentation/80211/cfg80211.rst Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,345 @@
==================
cfg80211 subsystem
==================
Device registration
===================
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:doc: Device registration
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_channel_flags
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_channel
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_rate_flags
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_rate
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_sta_ht_cap
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_supported_band
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_signal_type
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: wiphy_params_flags
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: wiphy_flags
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: wiphy
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: wireless_dev
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: wiphy_new
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: wiphy_register
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: wiphy_unregister
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: wiphy_free
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: wiphy_name
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: wiphy_dev
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: wiphy_priv
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: priv_to_wiphy
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: set_wiphy_dev
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: wdev_priv
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_iface_limit
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_iface_combination
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_check_combinations
Actions and configuration
=========================
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:doc: Actions and configuration
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_ops
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: vif_params
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: key_params
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: survey_info_flags
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: survey_info
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_beacon_data
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_ap_settings
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: station_parameters
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: rate_info_flags
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: rate_info
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: station_info
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: monitor_flags
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: mpath_info_flags
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: mpath_info
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: bss_parameters
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_txq_params
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_crypto_settings
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_auth_request
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_assoc_request
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_deauth_request
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_disassoc_request
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_ibss_params
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_connect_params
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_pmksa
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_rx_mlme_mgmt
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_auth_timeout
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_rx_assoc_resp
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_assoc_timeout
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_tx_mlme_mgmt
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_ibss_joined
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_connect_result
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_connect_bss
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_connect_timeout
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_roamed
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_disconnected
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_ready_on_channel
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_remain_on_channel_expired
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_new_sta
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_rx_mgmt
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_mgmt_tx_status
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_cqm_rssi_notify
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_cqm_pktloss_notify
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_michael_mic_failure
Scanning and BSS list handling
==============================
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:doc: Scanning and BSS list handling
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_ssid
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_scan_request
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_scan_done
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_bss
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_inform_bss
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_inform_bss_frame_data
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_inform_bss_data
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_unlink_bss
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_find_ie
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_bss_get_ie
Utility functions
=================
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:doc: Utility functions
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_channel_to_frequency
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_frequency_to_channel
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_get_channel
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_get_response_rate
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_hdrlen
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_get_hdrlen_from_skb
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_radiotap_iterator
Data path helpers
=================
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:doc: Data path helpers
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_data_to_8023
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_data_from_8023
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_amsdu_to_8023s
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_classify8021d
Regulatory enforcement infrastructure
=====================================
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:doc: Regulatory enforcement infrastructure
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: regulatory_hint
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: wiphy_apply_custom_regulatory
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: freq_reg_info
RFkill integration
==================
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:doc: RFkill integration
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: wiphy_rfkill_start_polling
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: wiphy_rfkill_stop_polling
Test mode
=========
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:doc: Test mode
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_testmode_alloc_reply_skb
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_testmode_reply
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_testmode_alloc_event_skb
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/cfg80211.h
:functions: cfg80211_testmode_event

5
Documentation/80211/conf.py Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
# -*- coding: utf-8; mode: python -*-
project = "Linux 802.11 Driver Developer's Guide"
tags.add("subproject")

17
Documentation/80211/index.rst Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
=====================================
Linux 802.11 Driver Developer's Guide
=====================================
.. toctree::
introduction
cfg80211
mac80211
mac80211-advanced
.. only:: subproject
Indices
=======
* :ref:`genindex`

17
Documentation/80211/introduction.rst Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
============
Introduction
============
Explaining wireless 802.11 networking in the Linux kernel
Copyright 2007-2009 Johannes Berg
These books attempt to give a description of the various subsystems
that play a role in 802.11 wireless networking in Linux. Since these
books are for kernel developers they attempts to document the
structures and functions used in the kernel as well as giving a
higher-level overview.
The reader is expected to be familiar with the 802.11 standard as
published by the IEEE in 802.11-2007 (or possibly later versions).
References to this standard will be given as "802.11-2007 8.1.5".

295
Documentation/80211/mac80211-advanced.rst Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,295 @@
=============================
mac80211 subsystem (advanced)
=============================
Information contained within this part of the book is of interest only
for advanced interaction of mac80211 with drivers to exploit more
hardware capabilities and improve performance.
LED support
===========
Mac80211 supports various ways of blinking LEDs. Wherever possible,
device LEDs should be exposed as LED class devices and hooked up to the
appropriate trigger, which will then be triggered appropriately by
mac80211.
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_get_tx_led_name
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_get_rx_led_name
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_get_radio_led_name
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_tpt_blink
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger
Hardware crypto acceleration
============================
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:doc: Hardware crypto acceleration
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: set_key_cmd
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_key_conf
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_key_flags
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k
Powersave support
=================
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:doc: Powersave support
Beacon filter support
=====================
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:doc: Beacon filter support
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_beacon_loss
Multiple queues and QoS support
===============================
TBD
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_tx_queue_params
Access point mode support
=========================
TBD
Some parts of the if_conf should be discussed here instead
Insert notes about VLAN interfaces with hw crypto here or in the hw
crypto chapter.
support for powersaving clients
-------------------------------
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:doc: AP support for powersaving clients
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_get_buffered_bc
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_beacon_get
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_sta_eosp
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_frame_release_type
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_sta_ps_transition
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_sta_set_buffered
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_sta_block_awake
Supporting multiple virtual interfaces
======================================
TBD
Note: WDS with identical MAC address should almost always be OK
Insert notes about having multiple virtual interfaces with different MAC
addresses here, note which configurations are supported by mac80211, add
notes about supporting hw crypto with it.
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic
Station handling
================
TODO
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_sta
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: sta_notify_cmd
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_find_sta
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr
Hardware scan offload
=====================
TBD
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_scan_completed
Aggregation
===========
TX A-MPDU aggregation
---------------------
.. kernel-doc:: net/mac80211/agg-tx.c
:doc: TX A-MPDU aggregation
.. WARNING: DOCPROC directive not supported: !Cnet/mac80211/agg-tx.c
RX A-MPDU aggregation
---------------------
.. kernel-doc:: net/mac80211/agg-rx.c
:doc: RX A-MPDU aggregation
.. WARNING: DOCPROC directive not supported: !Cnet/mac80211/agg-rx.c
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action
Spatial Multiplexing Powersave (SMPS)
=====================================
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:doc: Spatial multiplexing power save
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_request_smps
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_smps_mode
TBD
This part of the book describes the rate control algorithm interface and
how it relates to mac80211 and drivers.
Rate Control API
================
TBD
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_rate_control_changed
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_tx_rate_control
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: rate_control_send_low
TBD
This part of the book describes mac80211 internals.
Key handling
============
Key handling basics
-------------------
.. kernel-doc:: net/mac80211/key.c
:doc: Key handling basics
MORE TBD
--------
TBD
Receive processing
==================
TBD
Transmit processing
===================
TBD
Station info handling
=====================
Programming information
-----------------------
.. kernel-doc:: net/mac80211/sta_info.h
:functions: sta_info
.. kernel-doc:: net/mac80211/sta_info.h
:functions: ieee80211_sta_info_flags
STA information lifetime rules
------------------------------
.. kernel-doc:: net/mac80211/sta_info.c
:doc: STA information lifetime rules
Aggregation
===========
.. kernel-doc:: net/mac80211/sta_info.h
:functions: sta_ampdu_mlme
.. kernel-doc:: net/mac80211/sta_info.h
:functions: tid_ampdu_tx
.. kernel-doc:: net/mac80211/sta_info.h
:functions: tid_ampdu_rx
Synchronisation
===============
TBD
Locking, lots of RCU

216
Documentation/80211/mac80211.rst Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,216 @@
===========================
mac80211 subsystem (basics)
===========================
You should read and understand the information contained within this
part of the book while implementing a mac80211 driver. In some chapters,
advanced usage is noted, those may be skipped if this isn't needed.
This part of the book only covers station and monitor mode
functionality, additional information required to implement the other
modes is covered in the second part of the book.
Basic hardware handling
=======================
TBD
This chapter shall contain information on getting a hw struct allocated
and registered with mac80211.
Since it is required to allocate rates/modes before registering a hw
struct, this chapter shall also contain information on setting up the
rate/mode structs.
Additionally, some discussion about the callbacks and the general
programming model should be in here, including the definition of
ieee80211_ops which will be referred to a lot.
Finally, a discussion of hardware capabilities should be done with
references to other parts of the book.
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_hw
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_hw_flags
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: SET_IEEE80211_DEV
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_ops
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_alloc_hw
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_register_hw
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_unregister_hw
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_free_hw
PHY configuration
=================
TBD
This chapter should describe PHY handling including start/stop callbacks
and the various structures used.
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_conf
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_conf_flags
Virtual interfaces
==================
TBD
This chapter should describe virtual interface basics that are relevant
to the driver (VLANs, MGMT etc are not.) It should explain the use of
the add_iface/remove_iface callbacks as well as the interface
configuration callbacks.
Things related to AP mode should be discussed there.
Things related to supporting multiple interfaces should be in the
appropriate chapter, a BIG FAT note should be here about this though and
the recommendation to allow only a single interface in STA mode at
first!
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_vif
Receive and transmit processing
===============================
what should be here
-------------------
TBD
This should describe the receive and transmit paths in mac80211/the
drivers as well as transmit status handling.
Frame format
------------
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:doc: Frame format
Packet alignment
----------------
.. kernel-doc:: net/mac80211/rx.c
:doc: Packet alignment
Calling into mac80211 from interrupts
-------------------------------------
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:doc: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
functions/definitions
---------------------
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_rx_status
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: mac80211_rx_flags
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: mac80211_tx_info_flags
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: mac80211_tx_control_flags
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: mac80211_rate_control_flags
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_tx_rate
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_tx_info
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_rx
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_rx_ni
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_rx_irqsafe
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_tx_status
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_tx_status_ni
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_rts_get
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_rts_duration
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_ctstoself_get
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_ctstoself_duration
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_generic_frame_duration
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_wake_queue
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_stop_queue
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_wake_queues
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_stop_queues
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_queue_stopped
Frame filtering
===============
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:doc: Frame filtering
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_filter_flags
The mac80211 workqueue
======================
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:doc: mac80211 workqueue
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_queue_work
.. kernel-doc:: include/net/mac80211.h
:functions: ieee80211_queue_delayed_work

29
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-rbd
View File

@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ Description:
Being used for adding and removing rbd block devices.
Usage: <mon ip addr> <options> <pool name> <rbd image name> [snap name]
Usage: <mon ip addr> <options> <pool name> <rbd image name> [<snap name>]
$ echo "192.168.0.1 name=admin rbd foo" > /sys/bus/rbd/add
@ -14,9 +14,13 @@ The snapshot name can be "-" or omitted to map the image read/write. A <dev-id>
will be assigned for any registered block device. If snapshot is used, it will
be mapped read-only.
Removal of a device:
Usage: <dev-id> [force]
$ echo <dev-id> > /sys/bus/rbd/remove
$ echo 2 > /sys/bus/rbd/remove
Optional "force" argument which when passed will wait for running requests and
then unmap the image. Requests sent to the driver after initiating the removal
will be failed. (August 2016, since 4.9.)
What: /sys/bus/rbd/add_single_major
Date: December 2013
@ -43,10 +47,25 @@ Description: Available only if rbd module is inserted with single_major
Entries under /sys/bus/rbd/devices/<dev-id>/
--------------------------------------------
client_addr
The ceph unique client entity_addr_t (address + nonce).
The format is <address>:<port>/<nonce>: '1.2.3.4:1234/5678' or
'[1:2:3:4:5:6:7:8]:1234/5678'. (August 2016, since 4.9.)
client_id
The ceph unique client id that was assigned for this specific session.
cluster_fsid
The ceph cluster UUID. (August 2016, since 4.9.)
config_info
The string written into /sys/bus/rbd/add{,_single_major}. (August
2016, since 4.9.)
features
A hexadecimal encoding of the feature bits for this image.
@ -92,6 +111,10 @@ current_snap
The current snapshot for which the device is mapped.
snap_id
The current snapshot's id. (August 2016, since 4.9.)
parent
Information identifying the chain of parent images in a layered rbd

3
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led
View File

@ -24,7 +24,8 @@ Description:
of led events.
You can change triggers in a similar manner to the way an IO
scheduler is chosen. Trigger specific parameters can appear in
/sys/class/leds/<led> once a given trigger is selected.
/sys/class/leds/<led> once a given trigger is selected. For
their documentation see sysfs-class-led-trigger-*.
What: /sys/class/leds/<led>/inverted
Date: January 2011

36
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led-trigger-oneshot Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
What: /sys/class/leds/<led>/delay_on
Date: Jun 2012
KernelVersion: 3.6
Contact: linux-leds@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Specifies for how many milliseconds the LED has to stay at
LED_FULL brightness after it has been armed.
Defaults to 100 ms.
What: /sys/class/leds/<led>/delay_off
Date: Jun 2012
KernelVersion: 3.6
Contact: linux-leds@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Specifies for how many milliseconds the LED has to stay at
LED_OFF brightness after it has been armed.
Defaults to 100 ms.
What: /sys/class/leds/<led>/invert
Date: Jun 2012
KernelVersion: 3.6
Contact: linux-leds@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Reverse the blink logic. If set to 0 (default) blink on for
delay_on ms, then blink off for delay_off ms, leaving the LED
normally off. If set to 1, blink off for delay_off ms, then
blink on for delay_on ms, leaving the LED normally on.
Setting this value also immediately changes the LED state.
What: /sys/class/leds/<led>/shot
Date: Jun 2012
KernelVersion: 3.6
Contact: linux-leds@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Write any non-empty string to signal an events, this starts a
blink sequence if not already running.

12
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led-trigger-usbport Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
What: /sys/class/leds/<led>/ports/<port>
Date: September 2016
KernelVersion: 4.9
Contact: linux-leds@vger.kernel.org
linux-usb@vger.kernel.org
Description:
Every dir entry represents a single USB port that can be
selected for the USB port trigger. Selecting ports makes trigger
observing them for any connected devices and lighting on LED if
there are any.
Echoing "1" value selects USB port. Echoing "0" unselects it.
Current state can be also read.

2
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-mic.txt
View File

@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ Description:
What: /sys/class/mic/mic(x)/heartbeat_enable
Date: March 2015
KernelVersion: 3.20
KernelVersion: 4.4
Contact: Ashutosh Dixit <ashutosh.dixit@intel.com>
Description:
The MIC drivers detect and inform user space about card crashes

8
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-power
View File

@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ Description:
What: /sys/class/power_supply/max14577-charger/device/fast_charge_timer
Date: October 2014
KernelVersion: 3.18.0
Contact: Krzysztof Kozlowski <k.kozlowski@samsung.com>
Contact: Krzysztof Kozlowski <krzk@kernel.org>
Description:
This entry shows and sets the maximum time the max14577
charger operates in fast-charge mode. When the timer expires
@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ Description:
What: /sys/class/power_supply/max77693-charger/device/fast_charge_timer
Date: January 2015
KernelVersion: 3.19.0
Contact: Krzysztof Kozlowski <k.kozlowski@samsung.com>
Contact: Krzysztof Kozlowski <krzk@kernel.org>
Description:
This entry shows and sets the maximum time the max77693
charger operates in fast-charge mode. When the timer expires
@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ Description:
What: /sys/class/power_supply/max77693-charger/device/top_off_threshold_current
Date: January 2015
KernelVersion: 3.19.0
Contact: Krzysztof Kozlowski <k.kozlowski@samsung.com>
Contact: Krzysztof Kozlowski <krzk@kernel.org>
Description:
This entry shows and sets the charging current threshold for
entering top-off charging mode. When charging current in fast
@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Description:
What: /sys/class/power_supply/max77693-charger/device/top_off_timer
Date: January 2015
KernelVersion: 3.19.0
Contact: Krzysztof Kozlowski <k.kozlowski@samsung.com>
Contact: Krzysztof Kozlowski <krzk@kernel.org>
Description:
This entry shows and sets the maximum time the max77693
charger operates in top-off charge mode. When the timer expires

15
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-logitech-lg4ff
View File

@ -35,6 +35,12 @@ Description: Displays a set of alternate modes supported by a wheel. Each
DF-EX <*--------> G25 <-> G27
DF-EX <*----------------> G27
G29:
DF-EX <*> DFP <-> G25 <-> G27 <-> G29
DF-EX <*--------> G25 <-> G27 <-> G29
DF-EX <*----------------> G27 <-> G29
DF-EX <*------------------------> G29
DFGT:
DF-EX <*> DFP <-> DFGT
DF-EX <*--------> DFGT
@ -50,3 +56,12 @@ Description: Displays the real model of the wheel regardless of any
alternate mode the wheel might be switched to.
It is a read-only value.
This entry is not created for devices that have only one mode.
What: /sys/bus/hid/drivers/logitech/<dev>/combine_pedals
Date: Sep 2016
KernelVersion: 4.9
Contact: Simon Wood <simon@mungewell.org>
Description: Controls whether a combined value of accelerator and brake is
reported on the Y axis of the controller. Useful for older games
which can do not work with separate accelerator/brake axis.
Off ('0') by default, enabled by setting '1'.

5
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-wacom
View File

@ -24,6 +24,7 @@ What: /sys/bus/hid/devices/<bus>:<vid>:<pid>.<n>/wacom_led/status0_luminance
Date: August 2014
Contact: linux-input@vger.kernel.org
Description:
<obsoleted by the LED class API now exported by the driver>
Writing to this file sets the status LED luminance (1..127)
when the stylus does not touch the tablet surface, and no
button is pressed on the stylus. This luminance level is
@ -33,6 +34,7 @@ What: /sys/bus/hid/devices/<bus>:<vid>:<pid>.<n>/wacom_led/status1_luminance
Date: August 2014
Contact: linux-input@vger.kernel.org
Description:
<obsoleted by the LED class API now exported by the driver>
Writing to this file sets the status LED luminance (1..127)
when the stylus touches the tablet surface, or any button is
pressed on the stylus.
@ -41,6 +43,7 @@ What: /sys/bus/hid/devices/<bus>:<vid>:<pid>.<n>/wacom_led/status_led0_select
Date: August 2014
Contact: linux-input@vger.kernel.org
Description:
<obsoleted by the LED class API now exported by the driver>
Writing to this file sets which one of the four (for Intuos 4
and Intuos 5) or of the right four (for Cintiq 21UX2 and Cintiq
24HD) status LEDs is active (0..3). The other three LEDs on the
@ -50,6 +53,7 @@ What: /sys/bus/hid/devices/<bus>:<vid>:<pid>.<n>/wacom_led/status_led1_select
Date: August 2014
Contact: linux-input@vger.kernel.org
Description:
<obsoleted by the LED class API now exported by the driver>
Writing to this file sets which one of the left four (for Cintiq 21UX2
and Cintiq 24HD) status LEDs is active (0..3). The other three LEDs on
the left are always inactive.
@ -91,6 +95,7 @@ What: /sys/bus/hid/devices/<bus>:<vid>:<pid>.<n>/wacom_remote/<serial_number>/r
Date: July 2015
Contact: linux-input@vger.kernel.org
Description:
<obsoleted by the LED class API now exported by the driver>
Reading from this file reports the mode status of the
remote as indicated by the LED lights on the device. If no
reports have been received from the paired device, reading

31
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-i2c-bmp085
View File

@ -1,31 +0,0 @@
What: /sys/bus/i2c/devices/<busnum>-<devaddr>/pressure0_input
Date: June 2010
Contact: Christoph Mair <christoph.mair@gmail.com>
Description: Start a pressure measurement and read the result. Values
represent the ambient air pressure in pascal (0.01 millibar).
Reading: returns the current air pressure.
What: /sys/bus/i2c/devices/<busnum>-<devaddr>/temp0_input
Date: June 2010
Contact: Christoph Mair <christoph.mair@gmail.com>
Description: Measure the ambient temperature. The returned value represents
the ambient temperature in units of 0.1 degree celsius.
Reading: returns the current temperature.
What: /sys/bus/i2c/devices/<busnum>-<devaddr>/oversampling
Date: June 2010
Contact: Christoph Mair <christoph.mair@gmail.com>
Description: Tell the bmp085 to use more samples to calculate a pressure
value. When writing to this file the chip will use 2^x samples
to calculate the next pressure value with x being the value
written. Using this feature will decrease RMS noise and
increase the measurement time.
Reading: returns the current oversampling setting.
Writing: sets a new oversampling setting.
Accepted values: 0..3.

262
Documentation/Changes
View File

@ -1,8 +1,13 @@
.. _changes:
Minimal requerements to compile the Kernel
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Intro
=====
This document is designed to provide a list of the minimum levels of
software necessary to run the 3.0 kernels.
software necessary to run the 4.x kernels.
This document is originally based on my "Changes" file for 2.0.x kernels
and therefore owes credit to the same people as that file (Jared Mauch,
@ -10,9 +15,9 @@ Axel Boldt, Alessandro Sigala, and countless other users all over the
'net).
Current Minimal Requirements
============================
****************************
Upgrade to at *least* these software revisions before thinking you've
Upgrade to at **least** these software revisions before thinking you've
encountered a bug! If you're unsure what version you're currently
running, the suggested command should tell you.
@ -21,34 +26,40 @@ running a Linux kernel. Also, not all tools are necessary on all
systems; obviously, if you don't have any ISDN hardware, for example,
you probably needn't concern yourself with isdn4k-utils.
o GNU C 3.2 # gcc --version
o GNU make 3.80 # make --version
o binutils 2.12 # ld -v
o util-linux 2.10o # fdformat --version
o module-init-tools 0.9.10 # depmod -V
o e2fsprogs 1.41.4 # e2fsck -V
o jfsutils 1.1.3 # fsck.jfs -V
o reiserfsprogs 3.6.3 # reiserfsck -V
o xfsprogs 2.6.0 # xfs_db -V
o squashfs-tools 4.0 # mksquashfs -version
o btrfs-progs 0.18 # btrfsck
o pcmciautils 004 # pccardctl -V
o quota-tools 3.09 # quota -V
o PPP 2.4.0 # pppd --version
o isdn4k-utils 3.1pre1 # isdnctrl 2>&1|grep version
o nfs-utils 1.0.5 # showmount --version
o procps 3.2.0 # ps --version
o oprofile 0.9 # oprofiled --version
o udev 081 # udevd --version
o grub 0.93 # grub --version || grub-install --version
o mcelog 0.6 # mcelog --version
o iptables 1.4.2 # iptables -V
o openssl & libcrypto 1.0.0 # openssl version
o bc 1.06.95 # bc --version
====================== =============== ========================================
Program Minimal version Command to check the version
====================== =============== ========================================
GNU C 3.2 gcc --version
GNU make 3.80 make --version
binutils 2.12 ld -v
util-linux 2.10o fdformat --version
module-init-tools 0.9.10 depmod -V
e2fsprogs 1.41.4 e2fsck -V
jfsutils 1.1.3 fsck.jfs -V
reiserfsprogs 3.6.3 reiserfsck -V
xfsprogs 2.6.0 xfs_db -V
squashfs-tools 4.0 mksquashfs -version
btrfs-progs 0.18 btrfsck
pcmciautils 004 pccardctl -V
quota-tools 3.09 quota -V
PPP 2.4.0 pppd --version
isdn4k-utils 3.1pre1 isdnctrl 2>&1|grep version
nfs-utils 1.0.5 showmount --version
procps 3.2.0 ps --version
oprofile 0.9 oprofiled --version
udev 081 udevd --version
grub 0.93 grub --version || grub-install --version
mcelog 0.6 mcelog --version
iptables 1.4.2 iptables -V
openssl & libcrypto 1.0.0 openssl version
bc 1.06.95 bc --version
Sphinx\ [#f1]_ 1.2 sphinx-build --version
====================== =============== ========================================
.. [#f1] Sphinx is needed only to build the Kernel documentation
Kernel compilation
==================
******************
GCC
---
@ -64,16 +75,16 @@ You will need GNU make 3.80 or later to build the kernel.
Binutils
--------
Linux on IA-32 has recently switched from using as86 to using gas for
assembling the 16-bit boot code, removing the need for as86 to compile
Linux on IA-32 has recently switched from using ``as86`` to using ``gas`` for
assembling the 16-bit boot code, removing the need for ``as86`` to compile
your kernel. This change does, however, mean that you need a recent
release of binutils.
Perl
----
You will need perl 5 and the following modules: Getopt::Long, Getopt::Std,
File::Basename, and File::Find to build the kernel.
You will need perl 5 and the following modules: ``Getopt::Long``,
``Getopt::Std``, ``File::Basename``, and ``File::Find`` to build the kernel.
BC
--
@ -93,7 +104,7 @@ and higher.
System utilities
================
****************
Architectural changes
---------------------
@ -115,7 +126,7 @@ well as the desired DocBook stylesheets.
Util-linux
----------
New versions of util-linux provide *fdisk support for larger disks,
New versions of util-linux provide ``fdisk`` support for larger disks,
support new options to mount, recognize more supported partition
types, have a fdformat which works with 2.4 kernels, and similar goodies.
You'll probably want to upgrade.
@ -125,54 +136,57 @@ Ksymoops
If the unthinkable happens and your kernel oopses, you may need the
ksymoops tool to decode it, but in most cases you don't.
It is generally preferred to build the kernel with CONFIG_KALLSYMS so
It is generally preferred to build the kernel with ``CONFIG_KALLSYMS`` so
that it produces readable dumps that can be used as-is (this also
produces better output than ksymoops). If for some reason your kernel
is not build with CONFIG_KALLSYMS and you have no way to rebuild and
is not build with ``CONFIG_KALLSYMS`` and you have no way to rebuild and
reproduce the Oops with that option, then you can still decode that Oops
with ksymoops.
Module-Init-Tools
-----------------
A new module loader is now in the kernel that requires module-init-tools
A new module loader is now in the kernel that requires ``module-init-tools``
to use. It is backward compatible with the 2.4.x series kernels.
Mkinitrd
--------
These changes to the /lib/modules file tree layout also require that
These changes to the ``/lib/modules`` file tree layout also require that
mkinitrd be upgraded.
E2fsprogs
---------
The latest version of e2fsprogs fixes several bugs in fsck and
The latest version of ``e2fsprogs`` fixes several bugs in fsck and
debugfs. Obviously, it's a good idea to upgrade.
JFSutils
--------
The jfsutils package contains the utilities for the file system.
The ``jfsutils`` package contains the utilities for the file system.
The following utilities are available:
o fsck.jfs - initiate replay of the transaction log, and check
- ``fsck.jfs`` - initiate replay of the transaction log, and check
and repair a JFS formatted partition.
o mkfs.jfs - create a JFS formatted partition.
o other file system utilities are also available in this package.
- ``mkfs.jfs`` - create a JFS formatted partition.
- other file system utilities are also available in this package.
Reiserfsprogs
-------------
The reiserfsprogs package should be used for reiserfs-3.6.x
(Linux kernels 2.4.x). It is a combined package and contains working
versions of mkreiserfs, resize_reiserfs, debugreiserfs and
reiserfsck. These utils work on both i386 and alpha platforms.
versions of ``mkreiserfs``, ``resize_reiserfs``, ``debugreiserfs`` and
``reiserfsck``. These utils work on both i386 and alpha platforms.
Xfsprogs
--------
The latest version of xfsprogs contains mkfs.xfs, xfs_db, and the
xfs_repair utilities, among others, for the XFS filesystem. It is
The latest version of ``xfsprogs`` contains ``mkfs.xfs``, ``xfs_db``, and the
``xfs_repair`` utilities, among others, for the XFS filesystem. It is
architecture independent and any version from 2.0.0 onward should
work correctly with this version of the XFS kernel code (2.6.0 or
later is recommended, due to some significant improvements).
@ -180,7 +194,7 @@ later is recommended, due to some significant improvements).
PCMCIAutils
-----------
PCMCIAutils replaces pcmcia-cs. It properly sets up
PCMCIAutils replaces ``pcmcia-cs``. It properly sets up
PCMCIA sockets at system startup and loads the appropriate modules
for 16-bit PCMCIA devices if the kernel is modularized and the hotplug
subsystem is used.
@ -198,19 +212,20 @@ Intel IA32 microcode
A driver has been added to allow updating of Intel IA32 microcode,
accessible as a normal (misc) character device. If you are not using
udev you may need to:
udev you may need to::
mkdir /dev/cpu
mknod /dev/cpu/microcode c 10 184
chmod 0644 /dev/cpu/microcode
mkdir /dev/cpu
mknod /dev/cpu/microcode c 10 184
chmod 0644 /dev/cpu/microcode
as root before you can use this. You'll probably also want to
get the user-space microcode_ctl utility to use with this.
udev
----
udev is a userspace application for populating /dev dynamically with
only entries for devices actually present. udev replaces the basic
``udev`` is a userspace application for populating ``/dev`` dynamically with
only entries for devices actually present. ``udev`` replaces the basic
functionality of devfs, while allowing persistent device naming for
devices.
@ -218,10 +233,10 @@ FUSE
----
Needs libfuse 2.4.0 or later. Absolute minimum is 2.3.0 but mount
options 'direct_io' and 'kernel_cache' won't work.
options ``direct_io`` and ``kernel_cache`` won't work.
Networking
==========
**********
General changes
---------------
@ -243,9 +258,9 @@ enable it to operate over diverse media layers. If you use PPP,
upgrade pppd to at least 2.4.0.
If you are not using udev, you must have the device file /dev/ppp
which can be made by:
which can be made by::
mknod /dev/ppp c 108 0
mknod /dev/ppp c 108 0
as root.
@ -260,22 +275,22 @@ NFS-utils
In ancient (2.4 and earlier) kernels, the nfs server needed to know
about any client that expected to be able to access files via NFS. This
information would be given to the kernel by "mountd" when the client
mounted the filesystem, or by "exportfs" at system startup. exportfs
would take information about active clients from /var/lib/nfs/rmtab.
information would be given to the kernel by ``mountd`` when the client
mounted the filesystem, or by ``exportfs`` at system startup. exportfs
would take information about active clients from ``/var/lib/nfs/rmtab``.
This approach is quite fragile as it depends on rmtab being correct
which is not always easy, particularly when trying to implement
fail-over. Even when the system is working well, rmtab suffers from
fail-over. Even when the system is working well, ``rmtab`` suffers from
getting lots of old entries that never get removed.
With modern kernels we have the option of having the kernel tell mountd
when it gets a request from an unknown host, and mountd can give
appropriate export information to the kernel. This removes the
dependency on rmtab and means that the kernel only needs to know about
dependency on ``rmtab`` and means that the kernel only needs to know about
currently active clients.
To enable this new functionality, you need to:
To enable this new functionality, you need to::
mount -t nfsd nfsd /proc/fs/nfsd
@ -287,8 +302,32 @@ mcelog
------
On x86 kernels the mcelog utility is needed to process and log machine check
events when CONFIG_X86_MCE is enabled. Machine check events are errors reported
by the CPU. Processing them is strongly encouraged.
events when ``CONFIG_X86_MCE`` is enabled. Machine check events are errors
reported by the CPU. Processing them is strongly encouraged.
Kernel documentation
********************
Sphinx
------
The ReST markups currently used by the Documentation/ files are meant to be
built with ``Sphinx`` version 1.2 or upper. If you're desiring to build
PDF outputs, it is recommended to use version 1.4.6.
.. note::
Please notice that, for PDF and LaTeX output, you'll also need ``XeLaTeX``
version 3.14159265. Depending on the distribution, you may also need
to install a series of ``texlive`` packages that provide the minimal
set of functionalities required for ``XeLaTex`` to work.
Other tools
-----------
In order to produce documentation from DocBook, you'll also need ``xmlto``.
Please notice, however, that we're currently migrating all documents to use
``Sphinx``.
Getting updated software
========================
@ -298,114 +337,149 @@ Kernel compilation
gcc
---
o <ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/gcc/>
- <ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/gcc/>
Make
----
o <ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/make/>
- <ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/make/>
Binutils
--------
o <ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/devel/binutils/>
- <ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/devel/binutils/>
OpenSSL
-------
o <https://www.openssl.org/>
- <https://www.openssl.org/>
System utilities
****************
Util-linux
----------
o <ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util-linux/>
- <ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/util-linux/>
Ksymoops
--------
o <ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/kernel/ksymoops/v2.4/>
- <ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/kernel/ksymoops/v2.4/>
Module-Init-Tools
-----------------
o <ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/rusty/modules/>
- <ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/rusty/modules/>
Mkinitrd
--------
o <https://code.launchpad.net/initrd-tools/main>
- <https://code.launchpad.net/initrd-tools/main>
E2fsprogs
---------
o <http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/e2fsprogs/e2fsprogs-1.29.tar.gz>
- <http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/e2fsprogs/e2fsprogs-1.29.tar.gz>
JFSutils
--------
o <http://jfs.sourceforge.net/>
- <http://jfs.sourceforge.net/>
Reiserfsprogs
-------------
o <http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/fs/reiserfs/>
- <http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/fs/reiserfs/>
Xfsprogs
--------
o <ftp://oss.sgi.com/projects/xfs/>
- <ftp://oss.sgi.com/projects/xfs/>
Pcmciautils
-----------
o <ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/kernel/pcmcia/>
- <ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/kernel/pcmcia/>
Quota-tools
----------
o <http://sourceforge.net/projects/linuxquota/>
-----------
- <http://sourceforge.net/projects/linuxquota/>
DocBook Stylesheets
-------------------
o <http://sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-dsssl/>
- <http://sourceforge.net/projects/docbook/files/docbook-dsssl/>
XMLTO XSLT Frontend
-------------------
o <http://cyberelk.net/tim/xmlto/>
- <http://cyberelk.net/tim/xmlto/>
Intel P6 microcode
------------------
o <https://downloadcenter.intel.com/>
- <https://downloadcenter.intel.com/>
udev
----
o <http://www.freedesktop.org/software/systemd/man/udev.html>
- <http://www.freedesktop.org/software/systemd/man/udev.html>
FUSE
----
o <http://sourceforge.net/projects/fuse>
- <http://sourceforge.net/projects/fuse>
mcelog
------
o <http://www.mcelog.org/>
- <http://www.mcelog.org/>
Networking
**********
PPP
---
o <ftp://ftp.samba.org/pub/ppp/>
- <ftp://ftp.samba.org/pub/ppp/>
Isdn4k-utils
------------
o <ftp://ftp.isdn4linux.de/pub/isdn4linux/utils/>
- <ftp://ftp.isdn4linux.de/pub/isdn4linux/utils/>
NFS-utils
---------
o <http://sourceforge.net/project/showfiles.php?group_id=14>
- <http://sourceforge.net/project/showfiles.php?group_id=14>
Iptables
--------
o <http://www.iptables.org/downloads.html>
- <http://www.iptables.org/downloads.html>
Ip-route2
---------
o <https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/net/iproute2/>
- <https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/net/iproute2/>
OProfile
--------
o <http://oprofile.sf.net/download/>
- <http://oprofile.sf.net/download/>
NFS-Utils
---------
o <http://nfs.sourceforge.net/>
- <http://nfs.sourceforge.net/>
Kernel documentation
********************
Sphinx
------
- <http://www.sphinx-doc.org/>

2
Documentation/CodeOfConflict
View File

@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ please contact the Linux Foundation's Technical Advisory Board at
will work to resolve the issue to the best of their ability. For more
information on who is on the Technical Advisory Board and what their
role is, please see:
http://www.linuxfoundation.org/programs/advisory-councils/tab
http://www.linuxfoundation.org/projects/linux/tab
As a reviewer of code, please strive to keep things civil and focused on
the technical issues involved. We are all humans, and frustrations can

400
Documentation/CodingStyle
View File

@ -1,8 +1,10 @@
.. _codingstyle:
Linux kernel coding style
Linux kernel coding style
=========================
This is a short document describing the preferred coding style for the
linux kernel. Coding style is very personal, and I won't _force_ my
linux kernel. Coding style is very personal, and I won't **force** my
views on anybody, but this is what goes for anything that I have to be
able to maintain, and I'd prefer it for most other things too. Please
at least consider the points made here.
@ -13,7 +15,8 @@ and NOT read it. Burn them, it's a great symbolic gesture.
Anyway, here goes:
Chapter 1: Indentation
1) Indentation
--------------
Tabs are 8 characters, and thus indentations are also 8 characters.
There are heretic movements that try to make indentations 4 (or even 2!)
@ -36,8 +39,10 @@ benefit of warning you when you're nesting your functions too deep.
Heed that warning.
The preferred way to ease multiple indentation levels in a switch statement is
to align the "switch" and its subordinate "case" labels in the same column
instead of "double-indenting" the "case" labels. E.g.:
to align the ``switch`` and its subordinate ``case`` labels in the same column
instead of ``double-indenting`` the ``case`` labels. E.g.:
.. code-block:: c
switch (suffix) {
case 'G':
@ -59,6 +64,8 @@ instead of "double-indenting" the "case" labels. E.g.:
Don't put multiple statements on a single line unless you have
something to hide:
.. code-block:: c
if (condition) do_this;
do_something_everytime;
@ -71,7 +78,8 @@ used for indentation, and the above example is deliberately broken.
Get a decent editor and don't leave whitespace at the end of lines.
Chapter 2: Breaking long lines and strings
2) Breaking long lines and strings
----------------------------------
Coding style is all about readability and maintainability using commonly
available tools.
@ -87,7 +95,8 @@ with a long argument list. However, never break user-visible strings such as
printk messages, because that breaks the ability to grep for them.
Chapter 3: Placing Braces and Spaces
3) Placing Braces and Spaces
----------------------------
The other issue that always comes up in C styling is the placement of
braces. Unlike the indent size, there are few technical reasons to
@ -95,6 +104,8 @@ choose one placement strategy over the other, but the preferred way, as
shown to us by the prophets Kernighan and Ritchie, is to put the opening
brace last on the line, and put the closing brace first, thusly:
.. code-block:: c
if (x is true) {
we do y
}
@ -102,6 +113,8 @@ brace last on the line, and put the closing brace first, thusly:
This applies to all non-function statement blocks (if, switch, for,
while, do). E.g.:
.. code-block:: c
switch (action) {
case KOBJ_ADD:
return "add";
@ -116,6 +129,8 @@ while, do). E.g.:
However, there is one special case, namely functions: they have the
opening brace at the beginning of the next line, thus:
.. code-block:: c
int function(int x)
{
body of function
@ -123,20 +138,24 @@ opening brace at the beginning of the next line, thus:
Heretic people all over the world have claimed that this inconsistency
is ... well ... inconsistent, but all right-thinking people know that
(a) K&R are _right_ and (b) K&R are right. Besides, functions are
(a) K&R are **right** and (b) K&R are right. Besides, functions are
special anyway (you can't nest them in C).
Note that the closing brace is empty on a line of its own, _except_ in
Note that the closing brace is empty on a line of its own, **except** in
the cases where it is followed by a continuation of the same statement,
ie a "while" in a do-statement or an "else" in an if-statement, like
ie a ``while`` in a do-statement or an ``else`` in an if-statement, like
this:
.. code-block:: c
do {
body of do-loop
} while (condition);
and
.. code-block:: c
if (x == y) {
..
} else if (x > y) {
@ -155,11 +174,15 @@ comments on.
Do not unnecessarily use braces where a single statement will do.
.. code-block:: c
if (condition)
action();
and
.. code-block:: none
if (condition)
do_this();
else
@ -168,6 +191,8 @@ and
This does not apply if only one branch of a conditional statement is a single
statement; in the latter case use braces in both branches:
.. code-block:: c
if (condition) {
do_this();
do_that();
@ -175,57 +200,67 @@ statement; in the latter case use braces in both branches:
otherwise();
}
3.1: Spaces
3.1) Spaces
***********
Linux kernel style for use of spaces depends (mostly) on
function-versus-keyword usage. Use a space after (most) keywords. The
notable exceptions are sizeof, typeof, alignof, and __attribute__, which look
somewhat like functions (and are usually used with parentheses in Linux,
although they are not required in the language, as in: "sizeof info" after
"struct fileinfo info;" is declared).
although they are not required in the language, as in: ``sizeof info`` after
``struct fileinfo info;`` is declared).
So use a space after these keywords:
So use a space after these keywords::
if, switch, case, for, do, while
but not with sizeof, typeof, alignof, or __attribute__. E.g.,
.. code-block:: c
s = sizeof(struct file);
Do not add spaces around (inside) parenthesized expressions. This example is
*bad*:
**bad**:
.. code-block:: c
s = sizeof( struct file );
When declaring pointer data or a function that returns a pointer type, the
preferred use of '*' is adjacent to the data name or function name and not
preferred use of ``*`` is adjacent to the data name or function name and not
adjacent to the type name. Examples:
.. code-block:: c
char *linux_banner;
unsigned long long memparse(char *ptr, char **retptr);
char *match_strdup(substring_t *s);
Use one space around (on each side of) most binary and ternary operators,
such as any of these:
such as any of these::
= + - < > * / % | & ^ <= >= == != ? :
but no space after unary operators:
but no space after unary operators::
& * + - ~ ! sizeof typeof alignof __attribute__ defined
no space before the postfix increment & decrement unary operators:
no space before the postfix increment & decrement unary operators::
++ --
no space after the prefix increment & decrement unary operators:
no space after the prefix increment & decrement unary operators::
++ --
and no space around the '.' and "->" structure member operators.
and no space around the ``.`` and ``->`` structure member operators.
Do not leave trailing whitespace at the ends of lines. Some editors with
"smart" indentation will insert whitespace at the beginning of new lines as
``smart`` indentation will insert whitespace at the beginning of new lines as
appropriate, so you can start typing the next line of code right away.
However, some such editors do not remove the whitespace if you end up not
putting a line of code there, such as if you leave a blank line. As a result,
@ -237,22 +272,23 @@ of patches, this may make later patches in the series fail by changing their
context lines.
Chapter 4: Naming
4) Naming
---------
C is a Spartan language, and so should your naming be. Unlike Modula-2
and Pascal programmers, C programmers do not use cute names like
ThisVariableIsATemporaryCounter. A C programmer would call that
variable "tmp", which is much easier to write, and not the least more
variable ``tmp``, which is much easier to write, and not the least more
difficult to understand.
HOWEVER, while mixed-case names are frowned upon, descriptive names for
global variables are a must. To call a global function "foo" is a
global variables are a must. To call a global function ``foo`` is a
shooting offense.
GLOBAL variables (to be used only if you _really_ need them) need to
GLOBAL variables (to be used only if you **really** need them) need to
have descriptive names, as do global functions. If you have a function
that counts the number of active users, you should call that
"count_active_users()" or similar, you should _not_ call it "cntusr()".
``count_active_users()`` or similar, you should **not** call it ``cntusr()``.
Encoding the type of a function into the name (so-called Hungarian
notation) is brain damaged - the compiler knows the types anyway and can
@ -260,9 +296,9 @@ check those, and it only confuses the programmer. No wonder MicroSoft
makes buggy programs.
LOCAL variable names should be short, and to the point. If you have
some random integer loop counter, it should probably be called "i".
Calling it "loop_counter" is non-productive, if there is no chance of it
being mis-understood. Similarly, "tmp" can be just about any type of
some random integer loop counter, it should probably be called ``i``.
Calling it ``loop_counter`` is non-productive, if there is no chance of it
being mis-understood. Similarly, ``tmp`` can be just about any type of
variable that is used to hold a temporary value.
If you are afraid to mix up your local variable names, you have another
@ -270,59 +306,69 @@ problem, which is called the function-growth-hormone-imbalance syndrome.
See chapter 6 (Functions).
Chapter 5: Typedefs
5) Typedefs
-----------
Please don't use things like ``vps_t``.
It's a **mistake** to use typedef for structures and pointers. When you see a
.. code-block:: c
Please don't use things like "vps_t".
It's a _mistake_ to use typedef for structures and pointers. When you see a
vps_t a;
in the source, what does it mean?
In contrast, if it says
.. code-block:: c
struct virtual_container *a;
you can actually tell what "a" is.
you can actually tell what ``a`` is.
Lots of people think that typedefs "help readability". Not so. They are
Lots of people think that typedefs ``help readability``. Not so. They are
useful only for:
(a) totally opaque objects (where the typedef is actively used to _hide_
(a) totally opaque objects (where the typedef is actively used to **hide**
what the object is).
Example: "pte_t" etc. opaque objects that you can only access using
Example: ``pte_t`` etc. opaque objects that you can only access using
the proper accessor functions.
NOTE! Opaqueness and "accessor functions" are not good in themselves.
The reason we have them for things like pte_t etc. is that there
really is absolutely _zero_ portably accessible information there.
.. note::
(b) Clear integer types, where the abstraction _helps_ avoid confusion
whether it is "int" or "long".
Opaqueness and ``accessor functions`` are not good in themselves.
The reason we have them for things like pte_t etc. is that there
really is absolutely **zero** portably accessible information there.
(b) Clear integer types, where the abstraction **helps** avoid confusion
whether it is ``int`` or ``long``.
u8/u16/u32 are perfectly fine typedefs, although they fit into
category (d) better than here.
NOTE! Again - there needs to be a _reason_ for this. If something is
"unsigned long", then there's no reason to do
.. note::
Again - there needs to be a **reason** for this. If something is
``unsigned long``, then there's no reason to do
typedef unsigned long myflags_t;
but if there is a clear reason for why it under certain circumstances
might be an "unsigned int" and under other configurations might be
"unsigned long", then by all means go ahead and use a typedef.
might be an ``unsigned int`` and under other configurations might be
``unsigned long``, then by all means go ahead and use a typedef.
(c) when you use sparse to literally create a _new_ type for
(c) when you use sparse to literally create a **new** type for
type-checking.
(d) New types which are identical to standard C99 types, in certain
exceptional circumstances.
Although it would only take a short amount of time for the eyes and
brain to become accustomed to the standard types like 'uint32_t',
brain to become accustomed to the standard types like ``uint32_t``,
some people object to their use anyway.
Therefore, the Linux-specific 'u8/u16/u32/u64' types and their
Therefore, the Linux-specific ``u8/u16/u32/u64`` types and their
signed equivalents which are identical to standard types are
permitted -- although they are not mandatory in new code of your
own.
@ -333,7 +379,7 @@ useful only for:
(e) Types safe for use in userspace.
In certain structures which are visible to userspace, we cannot
require C99 types and cannot use the 'u32' form above. Thus, we
require C99 types and cannot use the ``u32`` form above. Thus, we
use __u32 and similar types in all structures which are shared
with userspace.
@ -341,10 +387,11 @@ Maybe there are other cases too, but the rule should basically be to NEVER
EVER use a typedef unless you can clearly match one of those rules.
In general, a pointer, or a struct that has elements that can reasonably
be directly accessed should _never_ be a typedef.
be directly accessed should **never** be a typedef.
Chapter 6: Functions
6) Functions
------------
Functions should be short and sweet, and do just one thing. They should
fit on one or two screenfuls of text (the ISO/ANSI screen size is 80x24,
@ -372,8 +419,10 @@ and it gets confused. You know you're brilliant, but maybe you'd like
to understand what you did 2 weeks from now.
In source files, separate functions with one blank line. If the function is
exported, the EXPORT* macro for it should follow immediately after the closing
function brace line. E.g.:
exported, the **EXPORT** macro for it should follow immediately after the
closing function brace line. E.g.:
.. code-block:: c
int system_is_up(void)
{
@ -386,7 +435,8 @@ Although this is not required by the C language, it is preferred in Linux
because it is a simple way to add valuable information for the reader.
Chapter 7: Centralized exiting of functions
7) Centralized exiting of functions
-----------------------------------
Albeit deprecated by some people, the equivalent of the goto statement is
used frequently by compilers in form of the unconditional jump instruction.
@ -396,18 +446,21 @@ locations and some common work such as cleanup has to be done. If there is no
cleanup needed then just return directly.
Choose label names which say what the goto does or why the goto exists. An
example of a good name could be "out_buffer:" if the goto frees "buffer". Avoid
using GW-BASIC names like "err1:" and "err2:". Also don't name them after the
goto location like "err_kmalloc_failed:"
example of a good name could be ``out_free_buffer:`` if the goto frees ``buffer``.
Avoid using GW-BASIC names like ``err1:`` and ``err2:``, as you would have to
renumber them if you ever add or remove exit paths, and they make correctness
difficult to verify anyway.
The rationale for using gotos is:
- unconditional statements are easier to understand and follow
- nesting is reduced
- errors by not updating individual exit points when making
modifications are prevented
modifications are prevented
- saves the compiler work to optimize redundant code away ;)
.. code-block:: c
int fun(int a)
{
int result = 0;
@ -425,27 +478,41 @@ The rationale for using gotos is:
goto out_buffer;
}
...
out_buffer:
out_free_buffer:
kfree(buffer);
return result;
}
A common type of bug to be aware of is "one err bugs" which look like this:
A common type of bug to be aware of is ``one err bugs`` which look like this:
.. code-block:: c
err:
kfree(foo->bar);
kfree(foo);
return ret;
The bug in this code is that on some exit paths "foo" is NULL. Normally the
fix for this is to split it up into two error labels "err_bar:" and "err_foo:".
The bug in this code is that on some exit paths ``foo`` is NULL. Normally the
fix for this is to split it up into two error labels ``err_free_bar:`` and
``err_free_foo:``:
.. code-block:: c
err_free_bar:
kfree(foo->bar);
err_free_foo:
kfree(foo);
return ret;
Ideally you should simulate errors to test all exit paths.
Chapter 8: Commenting
8) Commenting
-------------
Comments are good, but there is also a danger of over-commenting. NEVER
try to explain HOW your code works in a comment: it's much better to
write the code so that the _working_ is obvious, and it's a waste of
write the code so that the **working** is obvious, and it's a waste of
time to explain badly written code.
Generally, you want your comments to tell WHAT your code does, not HOW.
@ -461,11 +528,10 @@ When commenting the kernel API functions, please use the kernel-doc format.
See the files Documentation/kernel-documentation.rst and scripts/kernel-doc
for details.
Linux style for comments is the C89 "/* ... */" style.
Don't use C99-style "// ..." comments.
The preferred style for long (multi-line) comments is:
.. code-block:: c
/*
* This is the preferred style for multi-line
* comments in the Linux kernel source code.
@ -478,6 +544,8 @@ The preferred style for long (multi-line) comments is:
For files in net/ and drivers/net/ the preferred style for long (multi-line)
comments is a little different.
.. code-block:: c
/* The preferred comment style for files in net/ and drivers/net
* looks like this.
*
@ -491,10 +559,11 @@ multiple data declarations). This leaves you room for a small comment on each
item, explaining its use.
Chapter 9: You've made a mess of it
9) You've made a mess of it
---------------------------
That's OK, we all do. You've probably been told by your long-time Unix
user helper that "GNU emacs" automatically formats the C sources for
user helper that ``GNU emacs`` automatically formats the C sources for
you, and you've noticed that yes, it does do that, but the defaults it
uses are less than desirable (in fact, they are worse than random
typing - an infinite number of monkeys typing into GNU emacs would never
@ -503,63 +572,66 @@ make a good program).
So, you can either get rid of GNU emacs, or change it to use saner
values. To do the latter, you can stick the following in your .emacs file:
(defun c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only (ignored)
"Line up argument lists by tabs, not spaces"
(let* ((anchor (c-langelem-pos c-syntactic-element))
(column (c-langelem-2nd-pos c-syntactic-element))
(offset (- (1+ column) anchor))
(steps (floor offset c-basic-offset)))
(* (max steps 1)
c-basic-offset)))
.. code-block:: none
(add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook
(lambda ()
;; Add kernel style
(c-add-style
"linux-tabs-only"
'("linux" (c-offsets-alist
(arglist-cont-nonempty
c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg
c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only))))))
(defun c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only (ignored)
"Line up argument lists by tabs, not spaces"
(let* ((anchor (c-langelem-pos c-syntactic-element))
(column (c-langelem-2nd-pos c-syntactic-element))
(offset (- (1+ column) anchor))
(steps (floor offset c-basic-offset)))
(* (max steps 1)
c-basic-offset)))
(add-hook 'c-mode-hook
(lambda ()
(let ((filename (buffer-file-name)))
;; Enable kernel mode for the appropriate files
(when (and filename
(string-match (expand-file-name "~/src/linux-trees")
filename))
(setq indent-tabs-mode t)
(setq show-trailing-whitespace t)
(c-set-style "linux-tabs-only")))))
(add-hook 'c-mode-common-hook
(lambda ()
;; Add kernel style
(c-add-style
"linux-tabs-only"
'("linux" (c-offsets-alist
(arglist-cont-nonempty
c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg
c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only))))))
(add-hook 'c-mode-hook
(lambda ()
(let ((filename (buffer-file-name)))
;; Enable kernel mode for the appropriate files
(when (and filename
(string-match (expand-file-name "~/src/linux-trees")
filename))
(setq indent-tabs-mode t)
(setq show-trailing-whitespace t)
(c-set-style "linux-tabs-only")))))
This will make emacs go better with the kernel coding style for C
files below ~/src/linux-trees.
files below ``~/src/linux-trees``.
But even if you fail in getting emacs to do sane formatting, not
everything is lost: use "indent".
everything is lost: use ``indent``.
Now, again, GNU indent has the same brain-dead settings that GNU emacs
has, which is why you need to give it a few command line options.
However, that's not too bad, because even the makers of GNU indent
recognize the authority of K&R (the GNU people aren't evil, they are
just severely misguided in this matter), so you just give indent the
options "-kr -i8" (stands for "K&R, 8 character indents"), or use
"scripts/Lindent", which indents in the latest style.
options ``-kr -i8`` (stands for ``K&R, 8 character indents``), or use
``scripts/Lindent``, which indents in the latest style.
"indent" has a lot of options, and especially when it comes to comment
``indent`` has a lot of options, and especially when it comes to comment
re-formatting you may want to take a look at the man page. But
remember: "indent" is not a fix for bad programming.
remember: ``indent`` is not a fix for bad programming.
Chapter 10: Kconfig configuration files
10) Kconfig configuration files
-------------------------------
For all of the Kconfig* configuration files throughout the source tree,
the indentation is somewhat different. Lines under a "config" definition
the indentation is somewhat different. Lines under a ``config`` definition
are indented with one tab, while help text is indented an additional two
spaces. Example:
spaces. Example::
config AUDIT
config AUDIT
bool "Auditing support"
depends on NET
help
@ -569,9 +641,9 @@ config AUDIT
auditing without CONFIG_AUDITSYSCALL.
Seriously dangerous features (such as write support for certain
filesystems) should advertise this prominently in their prompt string:
filesystems) should advertise this prominently in their prompt string::
config ADFS_FS_RW
config ADFS_FS_RW
bool "ADFS write support (DANGEROUS)"
depends on ADFS_FS
...
@ -580,41 +652,45 @@ For full documentation on the configuration files, see the file
Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.txt.
Chapter 11: Data structures
11) Data structures
-------------------
Data structures that have visibility outside the single-threaded
environment they are created and destroyed in should always have
reference counts. In the kernel, garbage collection doesn't exist (and
outside the kernel garbage collection is slow and inefficient), which
means that you absolutely _have_ to reference count all your uses.
means that you absolutely **have** to reference count all your uses.
Reference counting means that you can avoid locking, and allows multiple
users to have access to the data structure in parallel - and not having
to worry about the structure suddenly going away from under them just
because they slept or did something else for a while.
Note that locking is _not_ a replacement for reference counting.
Note that locking is **not** a replacement for reference counting.
Locking is used to keep data structures coherent, while reference
counting is a memory management technique. Usually both are needed, and
they are not to be confused with each other.
Many data structures can indeed have two levels of reference counting,
when there are users of different "classes". The subclass count counts
when there are users of different ``classes``. The subclass count counts
the number of subclass users, and decrements the global count just once
when the subclass count goes to zero.
Examples of this kind of "multi-level-reference-counting" can be found in
memory management ("struct mm_struct": mm_users and mm_count), and in
filesystem code ("struct super_block": s_count and s_active).
Examples of this kind of ``multi-level-reference-counting`` can be found in
memory management (``struct mm_struct``: mm_users and mm_count), and in
filesystem code (``struct super_block``: s_count and s_active).
Remember: if another thread can find your data structure, and you don't
have a reference count on it, you almost certainly have a bug.
Chapter 12: Macros, Enums and RTL
12) Macros, Enums and RTL
-------------------------
Names of macros defining constants and labels in enums are capitalized.
.. code-block:: c
#define CONSTANT 0x12345
Enums are preferred when defining several related constants.
@ -626,7 +702,9 @@ Generally, inline functions are preferable to macros resembling functions.
Macros with multiple statements should be enclosed in a do - while block:
#define macrofun(a, b, c) \
.. code-block:: c
#define macrofun(a, b, c) \
do { \
if (a == 5) \
do_this(b, c); \
@ -636,17 +714,21 @@ Things to avoid when using macros:
1) macros that affect control flow:
.. code-block:: c
#define FOO(x) \
do { \
if (blah(x) < 0) \
return -EBUGGERED; \
} while (0)
is a _very_ bad idea. It looks like a function call but exits the "calling"
is a **very** bad idea. It looks like a function call but exits the ``calling``
function; don't break the internal parsers of those who will read the code.
2) macros that depend on having a local variable with a magic name:
.. code-block:: c
#define FOO(val) bar(index, val)
might look like a good thing, but it's confusing as hell when one reads the
@ -659,18 +741,22 @@ bite you if somebody e.g. turns FOO into an inline function.
must enclose the expression in parentheses. Beware of similar issues with
macros using parameters.
.. code-block:: c
#define CONSTANT 0x4000
#define CONSTEXP (CONSTANT | 3)
5) namespace collisions when defining local variables in macros resembling
functions:
#define FOO(x) \
({ \
typeof(x) ret; \
ret = calc_ret(x); \
(ret); \
})
.. code-block:: c
#define FOO(x) \
({ \
typeof(x) ret; \
ret = calc_ret(x); \
(ret); \
})
ret is a common name for a local variable - __foo_ret is less likely
to collide with an existing variable.
@ -679,11 +765,12 @@ The cpp manual deals with macros exhaustively. The gcc internals manual also
covers RTL which is used frequently with assembly language in the kernel.
Chapter 13: Printing kernel messages
13) Printing kernel messages
----------------------------
Kernel developers like to be seen as literate. Do mind the spelling
of kernel messages to make a good impression. Do not use crippled
words like "dont"; use "do not" or "don't" instead. Make the messages
words like ``dont``; use ``do not`` or ``don't`` instead. Make the messages
concise, clear, and unambiguous.
Kernel messages do not have to be terminated with a period.
@ -713,7 +800,8 @@ already inside a debug-related #ifdef section, printk(KERN_DEBUG ...) can be
used.
Chapter 14: Allocating memory
14) Allocating memory
---------------------
The kernel provides the following general purpose memory allocators:
kmalloc(), kzalloc(), kmalloc_array(), kcalloc(), vmalloc(), and
@ -722,6 +810,8 @@ about them.
The preferred form for passing a size of a struct is the following:
.. code-block:: c
p = kmalloc(sizeof(*p), ...);
The alternative form where struct name is spelled out hurts readability and
@ -734,20 +824,25 @@ language.
The preferred form for allocating an array is the following:
.. code-block:: c
p = kmalloc_array(n, sizeof(...), ...);
The preferred form for allocating a zeroed array is the following:
.. code-block:: c
p = kcalloc(n, sizeof(...), ...);
Both forms check for overflow on the allocation size n * sizeof(...),
and return NULL if that occurred.
Chapter 15: The inline disease
15) The inline disease
----------------------
There appears to be a common misperception that gcc has a magic "make me
faster" speedup option called "inline". While the use of inlines can be
faster" speedup option called ``inline``. While the use of inlines can be
appropriate (for example as a means of replacing macros, see Chapter 12), it
very often is not. Abundant use of the inline keyword leads to a much bigger
kernel, which in turn slows the system as a whole down, due to a bigger
@ -771,26 +866,27 @@ appears outweighs the potential value of the hint that tells gcc to do
something it would have done anyway.
Chapter 16: Function return values and names
16) Function return values and names
------------------------------------
Functions can return values of many different kinds, and one of the
most common is a value indicating whether the function succeeded or
failed. Such a value can be represented as an error-code integer
(-Exxx = failure, 0 = success) or a "succeeded" boolean (0 = failure,
(-Exxx = failure, 0 = success) or a ``succeeded`` boolean (0 = failure,
non-zero = success).
Mixing up these two sorts of representations is a fertile source of
difficult-to-find bugs. If the C language included a strong distinction
between integers and booleans then the compiler would find these mistakes
for us... but it doesn't. To help prevent such bugs, always follow this
convention:
convention::
If the name of a function is an action or an imperative command,
the function should return an error-code integer. If the name
is a predicate, the function should return a "succeeded" boolean.
For example, "add work" is a command, and the add_work() function returns 0
for success or -EBUSY for failure. In the same way, "PCI device present" is
For example, ``add work`` is a command, and the add_work() function returns 0
for success or -EBUSY for failure. In the same way, ``PCI device present`` is
a predicate, and the pci_dev_present() function returns 1 if it succeeds in
finding a matching device or 0 if it doesn't.
@ -805,17 +901,22 @@ result. Typical examples would be functions that return pointers; they use
NULL or the ERR_PTR mechanism to report failure.
Chapter 17: Don't re-invent the kernel macros
17) Don't re-invent the kernel macros
-------------------------------------
The header file include/linux/kernel.h contains a number of macros that
you should use, rather than explicitly coding some variant of them yourself.
For example, if you need to calculate the length of an array, take advantage
of the macro
.. code-block:: c
#define ARRAY_SIZE(x) (sizeof(x) / sizeof((x)[0]))
Similarly, if you need to calculate the size of some structure member, use
.. code-block:: c
#define FIELD_SIZEOF(t, f) (sizeof(((t*)0)->f))
There are also min() and max() macros that do strict type checking if you
@ -823,16 +924,21 @@ need them. Feel free to peruse that header file to see what else is already
defined that you shouldn't reproduce in your code.
Chapter 18: Editor modelines and other cruft
18) Editor modelines and other cruft
------------------------------------
Some editors can interpret configuration information embedded in source files,
indicated with special markers. For example, emacs interprets lines marked
like this:
.. code-block:: c
-*- mode: c -*-
Or like this:
.. code-block:: c
/*
Local Variables:
compile-command: "gcc -DMAGIC_DEBUG_FLAG foo.c"
@ -841,6 +947,8 @@ Or like this:
Vim interprets markers that look like this:
.. code-block:: c
/* vim:set sw=8 noet */
Do not include any of these in source files. People have their own personal
@ -850,7 +958,8 @@ own custom mode, or may have some other magic method for making indentation
work correctly.
Chapter 19: Inline assembly
19) Inline assembly
-------------------
In architecture-specific code, you may need to use inline assembly to interface
with CPU or platform functionality. Don't hesitate to do so when necessary.
@ -863,7 +972,7 @@ that inline assembly can use C parameters.
Large, non-trivial assembly functions should go in .S files, with corresponding
C prototypes defined in C header files. The C prototypes for assembly
functions should use "asmlinkage".
functions should use ``asmlinkage``.
You may need to mark your asm statement as volatile, to prevent GCC from
removing it if GCC doesn't notice any side effects. You don't always need to
@ -874,12 +983,15 @@ instructions, put each instruction on a separate line in a separate quoted
string, and end each string except the last with \n\t to properly indent the
next instruction in the assembly output:
.. code-block:: c
asm ("magic %reg1, #42\n\t"
"more_magic %reg2, %reg3"
: /* outputs */ : /* inputs */ : /* clobbers */);
Chapter 20: Conditional Compilation
20) Conditional Compilation
---------------------------
Wherever possible, don't use preprocessor conditionals (#if, #ifdef) in .c
files; doing so makes code harder to read and logic harder to follow. Instead,
@ -903,6 +1015,8 @@ unused, delete it.)
Within code, where possible, use the IS_ENABLED macro to convert a Kconfig
symbol into a C boolean expression, and use it in a normal C conditional:
.. code-block:: c
if (IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_SOMETHING)) {
...
}
@ -918,12 +1032,15 @@ At the end of any non-trivial #if or #ifdef block (more than a few lines),
place a comment after the #endif on the same line, noting the conditional
expression used. For instance:
.. code-block:: c
#ifdef CONFIG_SOMETHING
...
#endif /* CONFIG_SOMETHING */
Appendix I: References
Appendix I) References
----------------------
The C Programming Language, Second Edition
by Brian W. Kernighan and Dennis M. Ritchie.
@ -943,4 +1060,3 @@ language C, URL: http://www.open-std.org/JTC1/SC22/WG14/
Kernel CodingStyle, by greg@kroah.com at OLS 2002:
http://www.kroah.com/linux/talks/ols_2002_kernel_codingstyle_talk/html/

8
Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt
View File

@ -699,7 +699,7 @@ to use the dma_sync_*() interfaces.
dma_addr_t mapping;
mapping = dma_map_single(cp->dev, buffer, len, DMA_FROM_DEVICE);
if (dma_mapping_error(cp->dev, dma_handle)) {
if (dma_mapping_error(cp->dev, mapping)) {
/*
* reduce current DMA mapping usage,
* delay and try again later or
@ -931,10 +931,8 @@ to "Closing".
1) Struct scatterlist requirements.
Don't invent the architecture specific struct scatterlist; just use
<asm-generic/scatterlist.h>. You need to enable
CONFIG_NEED_SG_DMA_LENGTH if the architecture supports IOMMUs
(including software IOMMU).
You need to enable CONFIG_NEED_SG_DMA_LENGTH if the architecture
supports IOMMUs (including software IOMMU).
2) ARCH_DMA_MINALIGN

22
Documentation/DMA-API.txt
View File

@ -277,14 +277,26 @@ and <size> parameters are provided to do partial page mapping, it is
recommended that you never use these unless you really know what the
cache width is.
dma_addr_t
dma_map_resource(struct device *dev, phys_addr_t phys_addr, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction dir, unsigned long attrs)
void
dma_unmap_resource(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t addr, size_t size,
enum dma_data_direction dir, unsigned long attrs)
API for mapping and unmapping for MMIO resources. All the notes and
warnings for the other mapping APIs apply here. The API should only be
used to map device MMIO resources, mapping of RAM is not permitted.
int
dma_mapping_error(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr)
In some circumstances dma_map_single() and dma_map_page() will fail to create
a mapping. A driver can check for these errors by testing the returned
DMA address with dma_mapping_error(). A non-zero return value means the mapping
could not be created and the driver should take appropriate action (e.g.
reduce current DMA mapping usage or delay and try again later).
In some circumstances dma_map_single(), dma_map_page() and dma_map_resource()
will fail to create a mapping. A driver can check for these errors by testing
the returned DMA address with dma_mapping_error(). A non-zero return value
means the mapping could not be created and the driver should take appropriate
action (e.g. reduce current DMA mapping usage or delay and try again later).
int
dma_map_sg(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg,

17
Documentation/DMA-attributes.txt
View File

@ -126,3 +126,20 @@ means that we won't try quite as hard to get them.
NOTE: At the moment DMA_ATTR_ALLOC_SINGLE_PAGES is only implemented on ARM,
though ARM64 patches will likely be posted soon.
DMA_ATTR_NO_WARN
----------------
This tells the DMA-mapping subsystem to suppress allocation failure reports
(similarly to __GFP_NOWARN).
On some architectures allocation failures are reported with error messages
to the system logs. Although this can help to identify and debug problems,
drivers which handle failures (eg, retry later) have no problems with them,
and can actually flood the system logs with error messages that aren't any
problem at all, depending on the implementation of the retry mechanism.
So, this provides a way for drivers to avoid those error messages on calls
where allocation failures are not a problem, and shouldn't bother the logs.
NOTE: At the moment DMA_ATTR_NO_WARN is only implemented on PowerPC.

584
Documentation/DocBook/80211.tmpl
View File

@ -1,584 +0,0 @@
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE set PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []>
<set>
<setinfo>
<title>The 802.11 subsystems &ndash; for kernel developers</title>
<subtitle>
Explaining wireless 802.11 networking in the Linux kernel
</subtitle>
<copyright>
<year>2007-2009</year>
<holder>Johannes Berg</holder>
</copyright>
<authorgroup>
<author>
<firstname>Johannes</firstname>
<surname>Berg</surname>
<affiliation>
<address><email>johannes@sipsolutions.net</email></address>
</affiliation>
</author>
</authorgroup>
<legalnotice>
<para>
This documentation is free software; you can redistribute
it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
License version 2 as published by the Free Software Foundation.
</para>
<para>
This documentation is distributed in the hope that it will be
useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
See the GNU General Public License for more details.
</para>
<para>
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
License along with this documentation; if not, write to the Free
Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston,
MA 02111-1307 USA
</para>
<para>
For more details see the file COPYING in the source
distribution of Linux.
</para>
</legalnotice>
<abstract>
<para>
These books attempt to give a description of the
various subsystems that play a role in 802.11 wireless
networking in Linux. Since these books are for kernel
developers they attempts to document the structures
and functions used in the kernel as well as giving a
higher-level overview.
</para>
<para>
The reader is expected to be familiar with the 802.11
standard as published by the IEEE in 802.11-2007 (or
possibly later versions). References to this standard
will be given as "802.11-2007 8.1.5".
</para>
</abstract>
</setinfo>
<book id="cfg80211-developers-guide">
<bookinfo>
<title>The cfg80211 subsystem</title>
<abstract>
!Pinclude/net/cfg80211.h Introduction
</abstract>
</bookinfo>
<chapter>
<title>Device registration</title>
!Pinclude/net/cfg80211.h Device registration
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_channel_flags
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_channel
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_rate_flags
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_rate
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_sta_ht_cap
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_supported_band
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_signal_type
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h wiphy_params_flags
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h wiphy_flags
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h wiphy
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h wireless_dev
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h wiphy_new
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h wiphy_register
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h wiphy_unregister
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h wiphy_free
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h wiphy_name
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h wiphy_dev
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h wiphy_priv
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h priv_to_wiphy
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h set_wiphy_dev
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h wdev_priv
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_iface_limit
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_iface_combination
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_check_combinations
</chapter>
<chapter>
<title>Actions and configuration</title>
!Pinclude/net/cfg80211.h Actions and configuration
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_ops
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h vif_params
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h key_params
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h survey_info_flags
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h survey_info
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_beacon_data
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_ap_settings
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h station_parameters
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h rate_info_flags
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h rate_info
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h station_info
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h monitor_flags
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h mpath_info_flags
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h mpath_info
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h bss_parameters
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_txq_params
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_crypto_settings
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_auth_request
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_assoc_request
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_deauth_request
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_disassoc_request
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_ibss_params
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_connect_params
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_pmksa
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_rx_mlme_mgmt
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_auth_timeout
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_rx_assoc_resp
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_assoc_timeout
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_tx_mlme_mgmt
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_ibss_joined
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_connect_result
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_connect_bss
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_connect_timeout
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_roamed
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_disconnected
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_ready_on_channel
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_remain_on_channel_expired
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_new_sta
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_rx_mgmt
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_mgmt_tx_status
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_cqm_rssi_notify
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_cqm_pktloss_notify
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_michael_mic_failure
</chapter>
<chapter>
<title>Scanning and BSS list handling</title>
!Pinclude/net/cfg80211.h Scanning and BSS list handling
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_ssid
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_scan_request
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_scan_done
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_bss
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_inform_bss
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_inform_bss_frame_data
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_inform_bss_data
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_unlink_bss
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_find_ie
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_bss_get_ie
</chapter>
<chapter>
<title>Utility functions</title>
!Pinclude/net/cfg80211.h Utility functions
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_channel_to_frequency
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_frequency_to_channel
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_get_channel
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_get_response_rate
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_hdrlen
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_get_hdrlen_from_skb
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_radiotap_iterator
</chapter>
<chapter>
<title>Data path helpers</title>
!Pinclude/net/cfg80211.h Data path helpers
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_data_to_8023
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_data_from_8023
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h ieee80211_amsdu_to_8023s
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_classify8021d
</chapter>
<chapter>
<title>Regulatory enforcement infrastructure</title>
!Pinclude/net/cfg80211.h Regulatory enforcement infrastructure
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h regulatory_hint
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h wiphy_apply_custom_regulatory
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h freq_reg_info
</chapter>
<chapter>
<title>RFkill integration</title>
!Pinclude/net/cfg80211.h RFkill integration
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h wiphy_rfkill_start_polling
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h wiphy_rfkill_stop_polling
</chapter>
<chapter>
<title>Test mode</title>
!Pinclude/net/cfg80211.h Test mode
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_testmode_alloc_reply_skb
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_testmode_reply
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_testmode_alloc_event_skb
!Finclude/net/cfg80211.h cfg80211_testmode_event
</chapter>
</book>
<book id="mac80211-developers-guide">
<bookinfo>
<title>The mac80211 subsystem</title>
<abstract>
!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Introduction
!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Warning
</abstract>
</bookinfo>
<toc></toc>
<!--
Generally, this document shall be ordered by increasing complexity.
It is important to note that readers should be able to read only
the first few sections to get a working driver and only advanced
usage should require reading the full document.
-->
<part>
<title>The basic mac80211 driver interface</title>
<partintro>
<para>
You should read and understand the information contained
within this part of the book while implementing a driver.
In some chapters, advanced usage is noted, that may be
skipped at first.
</para>
<para>
This part of the book only covers station and monitor mode
functionality, additional information required to implement
the other modes is covered in the second part of the book.
</para>
</partintro>
<chapter id="basics">
<title>Basic hardware handling</title>
<para>TBD</para>
<para>
This chapter shall contain information on getting a hw
struct allocated and registered with mac80211.
</para>
<para>
Since it is required to allocate rates/modes before registering
a hw struct, this chapter shall also contain information on setting
up the rate/mode structs.
</para>
<para>
Additionally, some discussion about the callbacks and
the general programming model should be in here, including
the definition of ieee80211_ops which will be referred to
a lot.
</para>
<para>
Finally, a discussion of hardware capabilities should be done
with references to other parts of the book.
</para>
<!-- intentionally multiple !F lines to get proper order -->
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_hw
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_hw_flags
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h SET_IEEE80211_DEV
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_ops
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_alloc_hw
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_register_hw
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_unregister_hw
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_free_hw
</chapter>
<chapter id="phy-handling">
<title>PHY configuration</title>
<para>TBD</para>
<para>
This chapter should describe PHY handling including
start/stop callbacks and the various structures used.
</para>
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_conf
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_conf_flags
</chapter>
<chapter id="iface-handling">
<title>Virtual interfaces</title>
<para>TBD</para>
<para>
This chapter should describe virtual interface basics
that are relevant to the driver (VLANs, MGMT etc are not.)
It should explain the use of the add_iface/remove_iface
callbacks as well as the interface configuration callbacks.
</para>
<para>Things related to AP mode should be discussed there.</para>
<para>
Things related to supporting multiple interfaces should be
in the appropriate chapter, a BIG FAT note should be here about
this though and the recommendation to allow only a single
interface in STA mode at first!
</para>
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_vif
</chapter>
<chapter id="rx-tx">
<title>Receive and transmit processing</title>
<sect1>
<title>what should be here</title>
<para>TBD</para>
<para>
This should describe the receive and transmit
paths in mac80211/the drivers as well as
transmit status handling.
</para>
</sect1>
<sect1>
<title>Frame format</title>
!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Frame format
</sect1>
<sect1>
<title>Packet alignment</title>
!Pnet/mac80211/rx.c Packet alignment
</sect1>
<sect1>
<title>Calling into mac80211 from interrupts</title>
!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Calling mac80211 from interrupts
</sect1>
<sect1>
<title>functions/definitions</title>
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx_status
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h mac80211_rx_flags
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h mac80211_tx_info_flags
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h mac80211_tx_control_flags
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h mac80211_rate_control_flags
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_rate
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_info
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx_ni
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rx_irqsafe
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_status
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_status_ni
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rts_get
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rts_duration
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_ctstoself_get
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_ctstoself_duration
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_generic_frame_duration
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_wake_queue
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_queue
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_wake_queues
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_queues
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_queue_stopped
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="filters">
<title>Frame filtering</title>
!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Frame filtering
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_filter_flags
</chapter>
<chapter id="workqueue">
<title>The mac80211 workqueue</title>
!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h mac80211 workqueue
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_queue_work
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_queue_delayed_work
</chapter>
</part>
<part id="advanced">
<title>Advanced driver interface</title>
<partintro>
<para>
Information contained within this part of the book is
of interest only for advanced interaction of mac80211
with drivers to exploit more hardware capabilities and
improve performance.
</para>
</partintro>
<chapter id="led-support">
<title>LED support</title>
<para>
Mac80211 supports various ways of blinking LEDs. Wherever possible,
device LEDs should be exposed as LED class devices and hooked up to
the appropriate trigger, which will then be triggered appropriately
by mac80211.
</para>
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_tx_led_name
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_rx_led_name
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_radio_led_name
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tpt_blink
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger
</chapter>
<chapter id="hardware-crypto-offload">
<title>Hardware crypto acceleration</title>
!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Hardware crypto acceleration
<!-- intentionally multiple !F lines to get proper order -->
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h set_key_cmd
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_key_conf
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_key_flags
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k
</chapter>
<chapter id="powersave">
<title>Powersave support</title>
!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Powersave support
</chapter>
<chapter id="beacon-filter">
<title>Beacon filter support</title>
!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Beacon filter support
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_beacon_loss
</chapter>
<chapter id="qos">
<title>Multiple queues and QoS support</title>
<para>TBD</para>
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_queue_params
</chapter>
<chapter id="AP">
<title>Access point mode support</title>
<para>TBD</para>
<para>Some parts of the if_conf should be discussed here instead</para>
<para>
Insert notes about VLAN interfaces with hw crypto here or
in the hw crypto chapter.
</para>
<section id="ps-client">
<title>support for powersaving clients</title>
!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h AP support for powersaving clients
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_get_buffered_bc
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_beacon_get
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_sta_eosp
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_frame_release_type
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_sta_ps_transition
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_sta_set_buffered
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_sta_block_awake
</section>
</chapter>
<chapter id="multi-iface">
<title>Supporting multiple virtual interfaces</title>
<para>TBD</para>
<para>
Note: WDS with identical MAC address should almost always be OK
</para>
<para>
Insert notes about having multiple virtual interfaces with
different MAC addresses here, note which configurations are
supported by mac80211, add notes about supporting hw crypto
with it.
</para>
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic
</chapter>
<chapter id="station-handling">
<title>Station handling</title>
<para>TODO</para>
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_sta
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h sta_notify_cmd
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_find_sta
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr
</chapter>
<chapter id="hardware-scan-offload">
<title>Hardware scan offload</title>
<para>TBD</para>
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_scan_completed
</chapter>
<chapter id="aggregation">
<title>Aggregation</title>
<sect1>
<title>TX A-MPDU aggregation</title>
!Pnet/mac80211/agg-tx.c TX A-MPDU aggregation
!Cnet/mac80211/agg-tx.c
</sect1>
<sect1>
<title>RX A-MPDU aggregation</title>
!Pnet/mac80211/agg-rx.c RX A-MPDU aggregation
!Cnet/mac80211/agg-rx.c
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="smps">
<title>Spatial Multiplexing Powersave (SMPS)</title>
!Pinclude/net/mac80211.h Spatial multiplexing power save
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_request_smps
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_smps_mode
</chapter>
</part>
<part id="rate-control">
<title>Rate control interface</title>
<partintro>
<para>TBD</para>
<para>
This part of the book describes the rate control algorithm
interface and how it relates to mac80211 and drivers.
</para>
</partintro>
<chapter id="ratecontrol-api">
<title>Rate Control API</title>
<para>TBD</para>
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_rate_control_changed
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h ieee80211_tx_rate_control
!Finclude/net/mac80211.h rate_control_send_low
</chapter>
</part>
<part id="internal">
<title>Internals</title>
<partintro>
<para>TBD</para>
<para>
This part of the book describes mac80211 internals.
</para>
</partintro>
<chapter id="key-handling">
<title>Key handling</title>
<sect1>
<title>Key handling basics</title>
!Pnet/mac80211/key.c Key handling basics
</sect1>
<sect1>
<title>MORE TBD</title>
<para>TBD</para>
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="rx-processing">
<title>Receive processing</title>
<para>TBD</para>
</chapter>
<chapter id="tx-processing">
<title>Transmit processing</title>
<para>TBD</para>
</chapter>
<chapter id="sta-info">
<title>Station info handling</title>
<sect1>
<title>Programming information</title>
!Fnet/mac80211/sta_info.h sta_info
!Fnet/mac80211/sta_info.h ieee80211_sta_info_flags
</sect1>
<sect1>
<title>STA information lifetime rules</title>
!Pnet/mac80211/sta_info.c STA information lifetime rules
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="aggregation-internals">
<title>Aggregation</title>
!Fnet/mac80211/sta_info.h sta_ampdu_mlme
!Fnet/mac80211/sta_info.h tid_ampdu_tx
!Fnet/mac80211/sta_info.h tid_ampdu_rx
</chapter>
<chapter id="synchronisation">
<title>Synchronisation</title>
<para>TBD</para>
<para>Locking, lots of RCU</para>
</chapter>
</part>
</book>
</set>

14
Documentation/DocBook/Makefile
View File

@ -6,13 +6,13 @@
# To add a new book the only step required is to add the book to the
# list of DOCBOOKS.
DOCBOOKS := z8530book.xml device-drivers.xml \
DOCBOOKS := z8530book.xml \
kernel-hacking.xml kernel-locking.xml deviceiobook.xml \
writing_usb_driver.xml networking.xml \
kernel-api.xml filesystems.xml lsm.xml usb.xml kgdb.xml \
gadget.xml libata.xml mtdnand.xml librs.xml rapidio.xml \
genericirq.xml s390-drivers.xml uio-howto.xml scsi.xml \
80211.xml debugobjects.xml sh.xml regulator.xml \
debugobjects.xml sh.xml regulator.xml \
alsa-driver-api.xml writing-an-alsa-driver.xml \
tracepoint.xml w1.xml \
writing_musb_glue_layer.xml crypto-API.xml iio.xml
@ -22,8 +22,14 @@ ifeq ($(DOCBOOKS),)
# Skip DocBook build if the user explicitly requested no DOCBOOKS.
.DEFAULT:
@echo " SKIP DocBook $@ target (DOCBOOKS=\"\" specified)."
else
ifneq ($(SPHINXDIRS),)
# Skip DocBook build if the user explicitly requested a sphinx dir
.DEFAULT:
@echo " SKIP DocBook $@ target (SPHINXDIRS specified)."
else
###
# The build process is as follows (targets):
@ -66,6 +72,7 @@ installmandocs: mandocs
# no-op for the DocBook toolchain
epubdocs:
latexdocs:
###
#External programs used
@ -221,6 +228,7 @@ silent_gen_xml = :
echo "</programlisting>") > $@
endif # DOCBOOKS=""
endif # SPHINDIR=...
###
# Help targets as used by the top-level makefile

38
Documentation/DocBook/crypto-API.tmpl
View File

@ -797,7 +797,8 @@ kernel crypto API | Caller
include/linux/crypto.h and their definition can be seen below.
The former function registers a single transformation, while
the latter works on an array of transformation descriptions.
The latter is useful when registering transformations in bulk.
The latter is useful when registering transformations in bulk,
for example when a driver implements multiple transformations.
</para>
<programlisting>
@ -822,18 +823,31 @@ kernel crypto API | Caller
</para>
<para>
The bulk registration / unregistration functions require
that struct crypto_alg is an array of count size. These
functions simply loop over that array and register /
unregister each individual algorithm. If an error occurs,
the loop is terminated at the offending algorithm definition.
That means, the algorithms prior to the offending algorithm
are successfully registered. Note, the caller has no way of
knowing which cipher implementations have successfully
registered. If this is important to know, the caller should
loop through the different implementations using the single
instance *_alg functions for each individual implementation.
The bulk registration/unregistration functions
register/unregister each transformation in the given array of
length count. They handle errors as follows:
</para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
<para>
crypto_register_algs() succeeds if and only if it
successfully registers all the given transformations. If an
error occurs partway through, then it rolls back successful
registrations before returning the error code. Note that if
a driver needs to handle registration errors for individual
transformations, then it will need to use the non-bulk
function crypto_register_alg() instead.
</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
<para>
crypto_unregister_algs() tries to unregister all the given
transformations, continuing on error. It logs errors and
always returns zero.
</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Single-Block Symmetric Ciphers [CIPHER]</title>

521
Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl
View File

@ -1,521 +0,0 @@
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.1.2//EN"
"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.1.2/docbookx.dtd" []>
<book id="LinuxDriversAPI">
<bookinfo>
<title>Linux Device Drivers</title>
<legalnotice>
<para>
This documentation is free software; you can redistribute
it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later
version.
</para>
<para>
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be
useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
See the GNU General Public License for more details.
</para>
<para>
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
License along with this program; if not, write to the Free
Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston,
MA 02111-1307 USA
</para>
<para>
For more details see the file COPYING in the source
distribution of Linux.
</para>
</legalnotice>
</bookinfo>
<toc></toc>
<chapter id="Basics">
<title>Driver Basics</title>
<sect1><title>Driver Entry and Exit points</title>
!Iinclude/linux/init.h
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Atomic and pointer manipulation</title>
!Iarch/x86/include/asm/atomic.h
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Delaying, scheduling, and timer routines</title>
!Iinclude/linux/sched.h
!Ekernel/sched/core.c
!Ikernel/sched/cpupri.c
!Ikernel/sched/fair.c
!Iinclude/linux/completion.h
!Ekernel/time/timer.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Wait queues and Wake events</title>
!Iinclude/linux/wait.h
!Ekernel/sched/wait.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>High-resolution timers</title>
!Iinclude/linux/ktime.h
!Iinclude/linux/hrtimer.h
!Ekernel/time/hrtimer.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Workqueues and Kevents</title>
!Iinclude/linux/workqueue.h
!Ekernel/workqueue.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Internal Functions</title>
!Ikernel/exit.c
!Ikernel/signal.c
!Iinclude/linux/kthread.h
!Ekernel/kthread.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Kernel objects manipulation</title>
<!--
X!Iinclude/linux/kobject.h
-->
!Elib/kobject.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Kernel utility functions</title>
!Iinclude/linux/kernel.h
!Ekernel/printk/printk.c
!Ekernel/panic.c
!Ekernel/sys.c
!Ekernel/rcu/srcu.c
!Ekernel/rcu/tree.c
!Ekernel/rcu/tree_plugin.h
!Ekernel/rcu/update.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Device Resource Management</title>
!Edrivers/base/devres.c
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="devdrivers">
<title>Device drivers infrastructure</title>
<sect1><title>The Basic Device Driver-Model Structures </title>
!Iinclude/linux/device.h
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Device Drivers Base</title>
!Idrivers/base/init.c
!Edrivers/base/driver.c
!Edrivers/base/core.c
!Edrivers/base/syscore.c
!Edrivers/base/class.c
!Idrivers/base/node.c
!Edrivers/base/firmware_class.c
!Edrivers/base/transport_class.c
<!-- Cannot be included, because
attribute_container_add_class_device_adapter
and attribute_container_classdev_to_container
exceed allowed 44 characters maximum
X!Edrivers/base/attribute_container.c
-->
!Edrivers/base/dd.c
<!--
X!Edrivers/base/interface.c
-->
!Iinclude/linux/platform_device.h
!Edrivers/base/platform.c
!Edrivers/base/bus.c
</sect1>
<sect1>
<title>Buffer Sharing and Synchronization</title>
<para>
The dma-buf subsystem provides the framework for sharing buffers
for hardware (DMA) access across multiple device drivers and
subsystems, and for synchronizing asynchronous hardware access.
</para>
<para>
This is used, for example, by drm "prime" multi-GPU support, but
is of course not limited to GPU use cases.
</para>
<para>
The three main components of this are: (1) dma-buf, representing
a sg_table and exposed to userspace as a file descriptor to allow
passing between devices, (2) fence, which provides a mechanism
to signal when one device as finished access, and (3) reservation,
which manages the shared or exclusive fence(s) associated with
the buffer.
</para>
<sect2><title>dma-buf</title>
!Edrivers/dma-buf/dma-buf.c
!Iinclude/linux/dma-buf.h
</sect2>
<sect2><title>reservation</title>
!Pdrivers/dma-buf/reservation.c Reservation Object Overview
!Edrivers/dma-buf/reservation.c
!Iinclude/linux/reservation.h
</sect2>
<sect2><title>fence</title>
!Edrivers/dma-buf/fence.c
!Iinclude/linux/fence.h
!Edrivers/dma-buf/seqno-fence.c
!Iinclude/linux/seqno-fence.h
!Edrivers/dma-buf/fence-array.c
!Iinclude/linux/fence-array.h
!Edrivers/dma-buf/reservation.c
!Iinclude/linux/reservation.h
!Edrivers/dma-buf/sync_file.c
!Iinclude/linux/sync_file.h
</sect2>
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Device Drivers DMA Management</title>
!Edrivers/base/dma-coherent.c
!Edrivers/base/dma-mapping.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Device Drivers Power Management</title>
!Edrivers/base/power/main.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Device Drivers ACPI Support</title>
<!-- Internal functions only
X!Edrivers/acpi/sleep/main.c
X!Edrivers/acpi/sleep/wakeup.c
X!Edrivers/acpi/motherboard.c
X!Edrivers/acpi/bus.c
-->
!Edrivers/acpi/scan.c
!Idrivers/acpi/scan.c
<!-- No correct structured comments
X!Edrivers/acpi/pci_bind.c
-->
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Device drivers PnP support</title>
!Idrivers/pnp/core.c
<!-- No correct structured comments
X!Edrivers/pnp/system.c
-->
!Edrivers/pnp/card.c
!Idrivers/pnp/driver.c
!Edrivers/pnp/manager.c
!Edrivers/pnp/support.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Userspace IO devices</title>
!Edrivers/uio/uio.c
!Iinclude/linux/uio_driver.h
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="parportdev">
<title>Parallel Port Devices</title>
!Iinclude/linux/parport.h
!Edrivers/parport/ieee1284.c
!Edrivers/parport/share.c
!Idrivers/parport/daisy.c
</chapter>
<chapter id="message_devices">
<title>Message-based devices</title>
<sect1><title>Fusion message devices</title>
!Edrivers/message/fusion/mptbase.c
!Idrivers/message/fusion/mptbase.c
!Edrivers/message/fusion/mptscsih.c
!Idrivers/message/fusion/mptscsih.c
!Idrivers/message/fusion/mptctl.c
!Idrivers/message/fusion/mptspi.c
!Idrivers/message/fusion/mptfc.c
!Idrivers/message/fusion/mptlan.c
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="snddev">
<title>Sound Devices</title>
!Iinclude/sound/core.h
!Esound/sound_core.c
!Iinclude/sound/pcm.h
!Esound/core/pcm.c
!Esound/core/device.c
!Esound/core/info.c
!Esound/core/rawmidi.c
!Esound/core/sound.c
!Esound/core/memory.c
!Esound/core/pcm_memory.c
!Esound/core/init.c
!Esound/core/isadma.c
!Esound/core/control.c
!Esound/core/pcm_lib.c
!Esound/core/hwdep.c
!Esound/core/pcm_native.c
!Esound/core/memalloc.c
<!-- FIXME: Removed for now since no structured comments in source
X!Isound/sound_firmware.c
-->
</chapter>
<chapter id="uart16x50">
<title>16x50 UART Driver</title>
!Edrivers/tty/serial/serial_core.c
!Edrivers/tty/serial/8250/8250_core.c
</chapter>
<chapter id="fbdev">
<title>Frame Buffer Library</title>
<para>
The frame buffer drivers depend heavily on four data structures.
These structures are declared in include/linux/fb.h. They are
fb_info, fb_var_screeninfo, fb_fix_screeninfo and fb_monospecs.
The last three can be made available to and from userland.
</para>
<para>
fb_info defines the current state of a particular video card.
Inside fb_info, there exists a fb_ops structure which is a
collection of needed functions to make fbdev and fbcon work.
fb_info is only visible to the kernel.
</para>
<para>
fb_var_screeninfo is used to describe the features of a video card
that are user defined. With fb_var_screeninfo, things such as
depth and the resolution may be defined.
</para>
<para>
The next structure is fb_fix_screeninfo. This defines the
properties of a card that are created when a mode is set and can't
be changed otherwise. A good example of this is the start of the
frame buffer memory. This "locks" the address of the frame buffer
memory, so that it cannot be changed or moved.
</para>
<para>
The last structure is fb_monospecs. In the old API, there was
little importance for fb_monospecs. This allowed for forbidden things
such as setting a mode of 800x600 on a fix frequency monitor. With
the new API, fb_monospecs prevents such things, and if used
correctly, can prevent a monitor from being cooked. fb_monospecs
will not be useful until kernels 2.5.x.
</para>
<sect1><title>Frame Buffer Memory</title>
!Edrivers/video/fbdev/core/fbmem.c
</sect1>
<!--
<sect1><title>Frame Buffer Console</title>
X!Edrivers/video/console/fbcon.c
</sect1>
-->
<sect1><title>Frame Buffer Colormap</title>
!Edrivers/video/fbdev/core/fbcmap.c
</sect1>
<!-- FIXME:
drivers/video/fbgen.c has no docs, which stuffs up the sgml. Comment
out until somebody adds docs. KAO
<sect1><title>Frame Buffer Generic Functions</title>
X!Idrivers/video/fbgen.c
</sect1>
KAO -->
<sect1><title>Frame Buffer Video Mode Database</title>
!Idrivers/video/fbdev/core/modedb.c
!Edrivers/video/fbdev/core/modedb.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Frame Buffer Macintosh Video Mode Database</title>
!Edrivers/video/fbdev/macmodes.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Frame Buffer Fonts</title>
<para>
Refer to the file lib/fonts/fonts.c for more information.
</para>
<!-- FIXME: Removed for now since no structured comments in source
X!Ilib/fonts/fonts.c
-->
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="input_subsystem">
<title>Input Subsystem</title>
<sect1><title>Input core</title>
!Iinclude/linux/input.h
!Edrivers/input/input.c
!Edrivers/input/ff-core.c
!Edrivers/input/ff-memless.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Multitouch Library</title>
!Iinclude/linux/input/mt.h
!Edrivers/input/input-mt.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Polled input devices</title>
!Iinclude/linux/input-polldev.h
!Edrivers/input/input-polldev.c
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Matrix keyboards/keypads</title>
!Iinclude/linux/input/matrix_keypad.h
</sect1>
<sect1><title>Sparse keymap support</title>
!Iinclude/linux/input/sparse-keymap.h
!Edrivers/input/sparse-keymap.c
</sect1>
</chapter>
<chapter id="spi">
<title>Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)</title>
<para>
SPI is the "Serial Peripheral Interface", widely used with
embedded systems because it is a simple and efficient
interface: basically a multiplexed shift register.
Its three signal wires hold a clock (SCK, often in the range
of 1-20 MHz), a "Master Out, Slave In" (MOSI) data line, and
a "Master In, Slave Out" (MISO) data line.
SPI is a full duplex protocol; for each bit shifted out the
MOSI line (one per clock) another is shifted in on the MISO line.
Those bits are assembled into words of various sizes on the
way to and from system memory.
An additional chipselect line is usually active-low (nCS);
four signals are normally used for each peripheral, plus
sometimes an interrupt.
</para>
<para>
The SPI bus facilities listed here provide a generalized
interface to declare SPI busses and devices, manage them
according to the standard Linux driver model, and perform
input/output operations.
At this time, only "master" side interfaces are supported,
where Linux talks to SPI peripherals and does not implement
such a peripheral itself.
(Interfaces to support implementing SPI slaves would
necessarily look different.)
</para>
<para>
The programming interface is structured around two kinds of driver,
and two kinds of device.
A "Controller Driver" abstracts the controller hardware, which may
be as simple as a set of GPIO pins or as complex as a pair of FIFOs
connected to dual DMA engines on the other side of the SPI shift
register (maximizing throughput). Such drivers bridge between
whatever bus they sit on (often the platform bus) and SPI, and
expose the SPI side of their device as a
<structname>struct spi_master</structname>.
SPI devices are children of that master, represented as a
<structname>struct spi_device</structname> and manufactured from
<structname>struct spi_board_info</structname> descriptors which
are usually provided by board-specific initialization code.
A <structname>struct spi_driver</structname> is called a
"Protocol Driver", and is bound to a spi_device using normal
driver model calls.
</para>
<para>
The I/O model is a set of queued messages. Protocol drivers
submit one or more <structname>struct spi_message</structname>
objects, which are processed and completed asynchronously.
(There are synchronous wrappers, however.) Messages are
built from one or more <structname>struct spi_transfer</structname>
objects, each of which wraps a full duplex SPI transfer.
A variety of protocol tweaking options are needed, because
different chips adopt very different policies for how they
use the bits transferred with SPI.
</para>
!Iinclude/linux/spi/spi.h
!Fdrivers/spi/spi.c spi_register_board_info
!Edrivers/spi/spi.c
</chapter>
<chapter id="i2c">
<title>I<superscript>2</superscript>C and SMBus Subsystem</title>
<para>
I<superscript>2</superscript>C (or without fancy typography, "I2C")
is an acronym for the "Inter-IC" bus, a simple bus protocol which is
widely used where low data rate communications suffice.
Since it's also a licensed trademark, some vendors use another
name (such as "Two-Wire Interface", TWI) for the same bus.
I2C only needs two signals (SCL for clock, SDA for data), conserving
board real estate and minimizing signal quality issues.
Most I2C devices use seven bit addresses, and bus speeds of up
to 400 kHz; there's a high speed extension (3.4 MHz) that's not yet
found wide use.
I2C is a multi-master bus; open drain signaling is used to
arbitrate between masters, as well as to handshake and to
synchronize clocks from slower clients.
</para>
<para>
The Linux I2C programming interfaces support only the master
side of bus interactions, not the slave side.
The programming interface is structured around two kinds of driver,
and two kinds of device.
An I2C "Adapter Driver" abstracts the controller hardware; it binds
to a physical device (perhaps a PCI device or platform_device) and
exposes a <structname>struct i2c_adapter</structname> representing
each I2C bus segment it manages.
On each I2C bus segment will be I2C devices represented by a
<structname>struct i2c_client</structname>. Those devices will
be bound to a <structname>struct i2c_driver</structname>,
which should follow the standard Linux driver model.
(At this writing, a legacy model is more widely used.)
There are functions to perform various I2C protocol operations; at
this writing all such functions are usable only from task context.
</para>
<para>
The System Management Bus (SMBus) is a sibling protocol. Most SMBus
systems are also I2C conformant. The electrical constraints are
tighter for SMBus, and it standardizes particular protocol messages
and idioms. Controllers that support I2C can also support most
SMBus operations, but SMBus controllers don't support all the protocol
options that an I2C controller will.
There are functions to perform various SMBus protocol operations,
either using I2C primitives or by issuing SMBus commands to
i2c_adapter devices which don't support those I2C operations.
</para>
!Iinclude/linux/i2c.h
!Fdrivers/i2c/i2c-boardinfo.c i2c_register_board_info
!Edrivers/i2c/i2c-core.c
</chapter>
<chapter id="hsi">
<title>High Speed Synchronous Serial Interface (HSI)</title>
<para>
High Speed Synchronous Serial Interface (HSI) is a
serial interface mainly used for connecting application
engines (APE) with cellular modem engines (CMT) in cellular
handsets.
HSI provides multiplexing for up to 16 logical channels,
low-latency and full duplex communication.
</para>
!Iinclude/linux/hsi/hsi.h
!Edrivers/hsi/hsi_core.c
</chapter>
<chapter id="pwm">
<title>Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM)</title>
<para>
Pulse-width modulation is a modulation technique primarily used to
control power supplied to electrical devices.
</para>
<para>
The PWM framework provides an abstraction for providers and consumers
of PWM signals. A controller that provides one or more PWM signals is
registered as <structname>struct pwm_chip</structname>. Providers are
expected to embed this structure in a driver-specific structure. This
structure contains fields that describe a particular chip.
</para>
<para>
A chip exposes one or more PWM signal sources, each of which exposed
as a <structname>struct pwm_device</structname>. Operations can be
performed on PWM devices to control the period, duty cycle, polarity
and active state of the signal.
</para>
<para>
Note that PWM devices are exclusive resources: they can always only be
used by one consumer at a time.
</para>
!Iinclude/linux/pwm.h
!Edrivers/pwm/core.c
</chapter>
</book>

2
Documentation/DocBook/kernel-hacking.tmpl
View File

@ -483,7 +483,7 @@ printk(KERN_INFO "my ip: %pI4\n", &amp;ipaddress);
<function>get_user()</function>
/
<function>put_user()</function>
<filename class="headerfile">include/asm/uaccess.h</filename>
<filename class="headerfile">include/linux/uaccess.h</filename>
</title>
<para>

148
Documentation/HOWTO
View File

@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
HOWTO do Linux kernel development
---------------------------------
=================================
This is the be-all, end-all document on this topic. It contains
instructions on how to become a Linux kernel developer and how to learn
@ -28,6 +28,7 @@ kernel development. Assembly (any architecture) is not required unless
you plan to do low-level development for that architecture. Though they
are not a good substitute for a solid C education and/or years of
experience, the following books are good for, if anything, reference:
- "The C Programming Language" by Kernighan and Ritchie [Prentice Hall]
- "Practical C Programming" by Steve Oualline [O'Reilly]
- "C: A Reference Manual" by Harbison and Steele [Prentice Hall]
@ -64,7 +65,8 @@ people on the mailing lists are not lawyers, and you should not rely on
their statements on legal matters.
For common questions and answers about the GPL, please see:
http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl-faq.html
https://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl-faq.html
Documentation
@ -82,96 +84,118 @@ linux-api@vger.kernel.org.
Here is a list of files that are in the kernel source tree that are
required reading:
README
This file gives a short background on the Linux kernel and describes
what is necessary to do to configure and build the kernel. People
who are new to the kernel should start here.
Documentation/Changes
:ref:`Documentation/Changes <changes>`
This file gives a list of the minimum levels of various software
packages that are necessary to build and run the kernel
successfully.
Documentation/CodingStyle
:ref:`Documentation/CodingStyle <codingstyle>`
This describes the Linux kernel coding style, and some of the
rationale behind it. All new code is expected to follow the
guidelines in this document. Most maintainers will only accept
patches if these rules are followed, and many people will only
review code if it is in the proper style.
Documentation/SubmittingPatches
Documentation/SubmittingDrivers
:ref:`Documentation/SubmittingPatches <submittingpatches>` and :ref:`Documentation/SubmittingDrivers <submittingdrivers>`
These files describe in explicit detail how to successfully create
and send a patch, including (but not limited to):
- Email contents
- Email format
- Who to send it to
Following these rules will not guarantee success (as all patches are
subject to scrutiny for content and style), but not following them
will almost always prevent it.
Other excellent descriptions of how to create patches properly are:
"The Perfect Patch"
http://www.ozlabs.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt
https://www.ozlabs.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt
"Linux kernel patch submission format"
http://linux.yyz.us/patch-format.html
Documentation/stable_api_nonsense.txt
:ref:`Documentation/stable_api_nonsense.txt <stable_api_nonsense>`
This file describes the rationale behind the conscious decision to
not have a stable API within the kernel, including things like:
- Subsystem shim-layers (for compatibility?)
- Driver portability between Operating Systems.
- Mitigating rapid change within the kernel source tree (or
preventing rapid change)
This document is crucial for understanding the Linux development
philosophy and is very important for people moving to Linux from
development on other Operating Systems.
Documentation/SecurityBugs
:ref:`Documentation/SecurityBugs <securitybugs>`
If you feel you have found a security problem in the Linux kernel,
please follow the steps in this document to help notify the kernel
developers, and help solve the issue.
Documentation/ManagementStyle
:ref:`Documentation/ManagementStyle <managementstyle>`
This document describes how Linux kernel maintainers operate and the
shared ethos behind their methodologies. This is important reading
for anyone new to kernel development (or anyone simply curious about
it), as it resolves a lot of common misconceptions and confusion
about the unique behavior of kernel maintainers.
Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt
:ref:`Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt <stable_kernel_rules>`
This file describes the rules on how the stable kernel releases
happen, and what to do if you want to get a change into one of these
releases.
Documentation/kernel-docs.txt
:ref:`Documentation/kernel-docs.txt <kernel_docs>`
A list of external documentation that pertains to kernel
development. Please consult this list if you do not find what you
are looking for within the in-kernel documentation.
Documentation/applying-patches.txt
:ref:`Documentation/applying-patches.txt <applying_patches>`
A good introduction describing exactly what a patch is and how to
apply it to the different development branches of the kernel.
The kernel also has a large number of documents that can be
automatically generated from the source code itself. This includes a
automatically generated from the source code itself or from
ReStructuredText markups (ReST), like this one. This includes a
full description of the in-kernel API, and rules on how to handle
locking properly. The documents will be created in the
Documentation/DocBook/ directory and can be generated as PDF,
Postscript, HTML, and man pages by running:
locking properly.
All such documents can be generated as PDF or HTML by running::
make pdfdocs
make psdocs
make htmldocs
make mandocs
respectively from the main kernel source directory.
The documents that uses ReST markup will be generated at Documentation/output.
They can also be generated on LaTeX and ePub formats with::
make latexdocs
make epubdocs
Currently, there are some documents written on DocBook that are in
the process of conversion to ReST. Such documents will be created in the
Documentation/DocBook/ directory and can be generated also as
Postscript or man pages by running::
make psdocs
make mandocs
Becoming A Kernel Developer
---------------------------
If you do not know anything about Linux kernel development, you should
look at the Linux KernelNewbies project:
http://kernelnewbies.org
https://kernelnewbies.org
It consists of a helpful mailing list where you can ask almost any type
of basic kernel development question (make sure to search the archives
first, before asking something that has already been answered in the
@ -187,7 +211,9 @@ apply a patch.
If you do not know where you want to start, but you want to look for
some task to start doing to join into the kernel development community,
go to the Linux Kernel Janitor's project:
http://kernelnewbies.org/KernelJanitors
https://kernelnewbies.org/KernelJanitors
It is a great place to start. It describes a list of relatively simple
problems that need to be cleaned up and fixed within the Linux kernel
source tree. Working with the developers in charge of this project, you
@ -199,7 +225,8 @@ If you already have a chunk of code that you want to put into the kernel
tree, but need some help getting it in the proper form, the
kernel-mentors project was created to help you out with this. It is a
mailing list, and can be found at:
http://selenic.com/mailman/listinfo/kernel-mentors
https://selenic.com/mailman/listinfo/kernel-mentors
Before making any actual modifications to the Linux kernel code, it is
imperative to understand how the code in question works. For this
@ -209,6 +236,7 @@ tools. One such tool that is particularly recommended is the Linux
Cross-Reference project, which is able to present source code in a
self-referential, indexed webpage format. An excellent up-to-date
repository of the kernel code may be found at:
http://lxr.free-electrons.com/
@ -218,6 +246,7 @@ The development process
Linux kernel development process currently consists of a few different
main kernel "branches" and lots of different subsystem-specific kernel
branches. These different branches are:
- main 4.x kernel tree
- 4.x.y -stable kernel tree
- 4.x -git kernel patches
@ -227,14 +256,15 @@ branches. These different branches are:
4.x kernel tree
-----------------
4.x kernels are maintained by Linus Torvalds, and can be found on
kernel.org in the pub/linux/kernel/v4.x/ directory. Its development
https://kernel.org in the pub/linux/kernel/v4.x/ directory. Its development
process is as follows:
- As soon as a new kernel is released a two weeks window is open,
during this period of time maintainers can submit big diffs to
Linus, usually the patches that have already been included in the
-next kernel for a few weeks. The preferred way to submit big changes
is using git (the kernel's source management tool, more information
can be found at http://git-scm.com/) but plain patches are also just
can be found at https://git-scm.com/) but plain patches are also just
fine.
- After two weeks a -rc1 kernel is released it is now possible to push
only patches that do not include new features that could affect the
@ -253,9 +283,10 @@ process is as follows:
It is worth mentioning what Andrew Morton wrote on the linux-kernel
mailing list about kernel releases:
"Nobody knows when a kernel will be released, because it's
*"Nobody knows when a kernel will be released, because it's
released according to perceived bug status, not according to a
preconceived timeline."
preconceived timeline."*
4.x.y -stable kernel tree
-------------------------
@ -301,7 +332,7 @@ submission and other already ongoing work are avoided.
Most of these repositories are git trees, but there are also other SCMs
in use, or patch queues being published as quilt series. Addresses of
these subsystem repositories are listed in the MAINTAINERS file. Many
of them can be browsed at http://git.kernel.org/.
of them can be browsed at https://git.kernel.org/.
Before a proposed patch is committed to such a subsystem tree, it is
subject to review which primarily happens on mailing lists (see the
@ -310,7 +341,7 @@ process is tracked with the tool patchwork. Patchwork offers a web
interface which shows patch postings, any comments on a patch or
revisions to it, and maintainers can mark patches as under review,
accepted, or rejected. Most of these patchwork sites are listed at
http://patchwork.kernel.org/.
https://patchwork.kernel.org/.
4.x -next kernel tree for integration tests
-------------------------------------------
@ -318,7 +349,8 @@ Before updates from subsystem trees are merged into the mainline 4.x
tree, they need to be integration-tested. For this purpose, a special
testing repository exists into which virtually all subsystem trees are
pulled on an almost daily basis:
http://git.kernel.org/?p=linux/kernel/git/next/linux-next.git
https://git.kernel.org/?p=linux/kernel/git/next/linux-next.git
This way, the -next kernel gives a summary outlook onto what will be
expected to go into the mainline kernel at the next merge period.
@ -328,10 +360,11 @@ Adventurous testers are very welcome to runtime-test the -next kernel.
Bug Reporting
-------------
bugzilla.kernel.org is where the Linux kernel developers track kernel
https://bugzilla.kernel.org is where the Linux kernel developers track kernel
bugs. Users are encouraged to report all bugs that they find in this
tool. For details on how to use the kernel bugzilla, please see:
http://bugzilla.kernel.org/page.cgi?id=faq.html
https://bugzilla.kernel.org/page.cgi?id=faq.html
The file REPORTING-BUGS in the main kernel source directory has a good
template for how to report a possible kernel bug, and details what kind
@ -349,13 +382,14 @@ your skills, and other developers will be aware of your presence. Fixing
bugs is one of the best ways to get merits among other developers, because
not many people like wasting time fixing other people's bugs.
To work in the already reported bug reports, go to http://bugzilla.kernel.org.
To work in the already reported bug reports, go to https://bugzilla.kernel.org.
If you want to be advised of the future bug reports, you can subscribe to the
bugme-new mailing list (only new bug reports are mailed here) or to the
bugme-janitor mailing list (every change in the bugzilla is mailed here)
http://lists.linux-foundation.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-new
http://lists.linux-foundation.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-janitors
https://lists.linux-foundation.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-new
https://lists.linux-foundation.org/mailman/listinfo/bugme-janitors
@ -365,10 +399,14 @@ Mailing lists
As some of the above documents describe, the majority of the core kernel
developers participate on the Linux Kernel Mailing list. Details on how
to subscribe and unsubscribe from the list can be found at:
http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html#linux-kernel
There are archives of the mailing list on the web in many different
places. Use a search engine to find these archives. For example:
http://dir.gmane.org/gmane.linux.kernel
It is highly recommended that you search the archives about the topic
you want to bring up, before you post it to the list. A lot of things
already discussed in detail are only recorded at the mailing list
@ -381,11 +419,13 @@ groups.
Many of the lists are hosted on kernel.org. Information on them can be
found at:
http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html
Please remember to follow good behavioral habits when using the lists.
Though a bit cheesy, the following URL has some simple guidelines for
interacting with the list (or any list):
http://www.albion.com/netiquette/
If multiple people respond to your mail, the CC: list of recipients may
@ -400,13 +440,14 @@ add your statements between the individual quoted sections instead of
writing at the top of the mail.
If you add patches to your mail, make sure they are plain readable text
as stated in Documentation/SubmittingPatches. Kernel developers don't
want to deal with attachments or compressed patches; they may want
to comment on individual lines of your patch, which works only that way.
Make sure you use a mail program that does not mangle spaces and tab
characters. A good first test is to send the mail to yourself and try
to apply your own patch by yourself. If that doesn't work, get your
mail program fixed or change it until it works.
as stated in Documentation/SubmittingPatches.
Kernel developers don't want to deal with
attachments or compressed patches; they may want to comment on
individual lines of your patch, which works only that way. Make sure you
use a mail program that does not mangle spaces and tab characters. A
good first test is to send the mail to yourself and try to apply your
own patch by yourself. If that doesn't work, get your mail program fixed
or change it until it works.
Above all, please remember to show respect to other subscribers.
@ -418,6 +459,7 @@ The goal of the kernel community is to provide the best possible kernel
there is. When you submit a patch for acceptance, it will be reviewed
on its technical merits and those alone. So, what should you be
expecting?
- criticism
- comments
- requests for change
@ -432,6 +474,7 @@ If there are no responses to your posting, wait a few days and try
again, sometimes things get lost in the huge volume.
What should you not do?
- expect your patch to be accepted without question
- become defensive
- ignore comments
@ -445,8 +488,8 @@ Remember, being wrong is acceptable as long as you are willing to work
toward a solution that is right.
It is normal that the answers to your first patch might simply be a list
of a dozen things you should correct. This does _not_ imply that your
patch will not be accepted, and it is _not_ meant against you
of a dozen things you should correct. This does **not** imply that your
patch will not be accepted, and it is **not** meant against you
personally. Simply correct all issues raised against your patch and
resend it.
@ -457,7 +500,9 @@ Differences between the kernel community and corporate structures
The kernel community works differently than most traditional corporate
development environments. Here are a list of things that you can try to
do to avoid problems:
Good things to say regarding your proposed changes:
- "This solves multiple problems."
- "This deletes 2000 lines of code."
- "Here is a patch that explains what I am trying to describe."
@ -466,6 +511,7 @@ do to avoid problems:
- "This increases performance on typical machines..."
Bad things you should avoid saying:
- "We did it this way in AIX/ptx/Solaris, so therefore it must be
good..."
- "I've being doing this for 20 years, so..."
@ -527,17 +573,18 @@ The reasons for breaking things up are the following:
and simplify (or simply re-order) patches before submitting them.
Here is an analogy from kernel developer Al Viro:
"Think of a teacher grading homework from a math student. The
*"Think of a teacher grading homework from a math student. The
teacher does not want to see the student's trials and errors
before they came up with the solution. They want to see the
cleanest, most elegant answer. A good student knows this, and
would never submit her intermediate work before the final
solution."
solution.*
The same is true of kernel development. The maintainers and
*The same is true of kernel development. The maintainers and
reviewers do not want to see the thought process behind the
solution to the problem one is solving. They want to see a
simple and elegant solution."
simple and elegant solution."*
It may be challenging to keep the balance between presenting an elegant
solution and working together with the community and discussing your
@ -565,6 +612,7 @@ When sending in your patches, pay special attention to what you say in
the text in your email. This information will become the ChangeLog
information for the patch, and will be preserved for everyone to see for
all time. It should describe the patch completely, containing:
- why the change is necessary
- the overall design approach in the patch
- implementation details
@ -572,12 +620,11 @@ all time. It should describe the patch completely, containing:
For more details on what this should all look like, please see the
ChangeLog section of the document:
"The Perfect Patch"
http://www.ozlabs.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt
All of these things are sometimes very hard to do. It can take years to
perfect these practices (if at all). It's a continuous process of
improvement that requires a lot of patience and determination. But
@ -588,8 +635,9 @@ start exactly where you are now.
----------
Thanks to Paolo Ciarrocchi who allowed the "Development Process"
(http://lwn.net/Articles/94386/) section
(https://lwn.net/Articles/94386/) section
to be based on text he had written, and to Randy Dunlap and Gerrit
Huizenga for some of the list of things you should and should not say.
Also thanks to Pat Mochel, Hanna Linder, Randy Dunlap, Kay Sievers,

4
Documentation/Makefile
View File

@ -1,3 +1 @@
subdir-y := accounting auxdisplay blackfin \
filesystems filesystems ia64 laptops mic misc-devices \
networking pcmcia prctl ptp timers vDSO watchdog
subdir-y :=

64
Documentation/Makefile.sphinx
View File

@ -5,6 +5,9 @@
# You can set these variables from the command line.
SPHINXBUILD = sphinx-build
SPHINXOPTS =
SPHINXDIRS = .
_SPHINXDIRS = $(patsubst $(srctree)/Documentation/%/conf.py,%,$(wildcard $(srctree)/Documentation/*/conf.py))
SPHINX_CONF = conf.py
PAPER =
BUILDDIR = $(obj)/output
@ -25,38 +28,62 @@ else ifneq ($(DOCBOOKS),)
else # HAVE_SPHINX
# User-friendly check for rst2pdf
HAVE_RST2PDF := $(shell if python -c "import rst2pdf" >/dev/null 2>&1; then echo 1; else echo 0; fi)
# User-friendly check for pdflatex
HAVE_PDFLATEX := $(shell if which xelatex >/dev/null 2>&1; then echo 1; else echo 0; fi)
# Internal variables.
PAPEROPT_a4 = -D latex_paper_size=a4
PAPEROPT_letter = -D latex_paper_size=letter
KERNELDOC = $(srctree)/scripts/kernel-doc
KERNELDOC_CONF = -D kerneldoc_srctree=$(srctree) -D kerneldoc_bin=$(KERNELDOC)
ALLSPHINXOPTS = -D version=$(KERNELVERSION) -D release=$(KERNELRELEASE) -d $(BUILDDIR)/.doctrees $(KERNELDOC_CONF) $(PAPEROPT_$(PAPER)) -c $(srctree)/$(src) $(SPHINXOPTS) $(srctree)/$(src)
ALLSPHINXOPTS = $(KERNELDOC_CONF) $(PAPEROPT_$(PAPER)) $(SPHINXOPTS)
# the i18n builder cannot share the environment and doctrees with the others
I18NSPHINXOPTS = $(PAPEROPT_$(PAPER)) $(SPHINXOPTS) .
quiet_cmd_sphinx = SPHINX $@
cmd_sphinx = BUILDDIR=$(BUILDDIR) $(SPHINXBUILD) -b $2 $(ALLSPHINXOPTS) $(BUILDDIR)/$2
# commands; the 'cmd' from scripts/Kbuild.include is not *loopable*
loop_cmd = $(echo-cmd) $(cmd_$(1))
# $2 sphinx builder e.g. "html"
# $3 name of the build subfolder / e.g. "media", used as:
# * dest folder relative to $(BUILDDIR) and
# * cache folder relative to $(BUILDDIR)/.doctrees
# $4 dest subfolder e.g. "man" for man pages at media/man
# $5 reST source folder relative to $(srctree)/$(src),
# e.g. "media" for the linux-tv book-set at ./Documentation/media
quiet_cmd_sphinx = SPHINX $@ --> file://$(abspath $(BUILDDIR)/$3/$4);
cmd_sphinx = $(MAKE) BUILDDIR=$(abspath $(BUILDDIR)) $(build)=Documentation/media all;\
BUILDDIR=$(abspath $(BUILDDIR)) SPHINX_CONF=$(abspath $(srctree)/$(src)/$5/$(SPHINX_CONF)) \
$(SPHINXBUILD) \
-b $2 \
-c $(abspath $(srctree)/$(src)) \
-d $(abspath $(BUILDDIR)/.doctrees/$3) \
-D version=$(KERNELVERSION) -D release=$(KERNELRELEASE) \
$(ALLSPHINXOPTS) \
$(abspath $(srctree)/$(src)/$5) \
$(abspath $(BUILDDIR)/$3/$4);
htmldocs:
$(MAKE) BUILDDIR=$(BUILDDIR) -f $(srctree)/Documentation/media/Makefile $@
$(call cmd,sphinx,html)
@$(foreach var,$(SPHINXDIRS),$(call loop_cmd,sphinx,html,$(var),,$(var)))
pdfdocs:
ifeq ($(HAVE_RST2PDF),0)
$(warning The Python 'rst2pdf' module was not found. Make sure you have the module installed to produce PDF output.)
latexdocs:
ifeq ($(HAVE_PDFLATEX),0)
$(warning The 'xelatex' command was not found. Make sure you have it installed and in PATH to produce PDF output.)
@echo " SKIP Sphinx $@ target."
else # HAVE_RST2PDF
$(call cmd,sphinx,pdf)
endif # HAVE_RST2PDF
else # HAVE_PDFLATEX
@$(foreach var,$(SPHINXDIRS),$(call loop_cmd,sphinx,latex,$(var),latex,$(var)))
endif # HAVE_PDFLATEX
pdfdocs: latexdocs
ifneq ($(HAVE_PDFLATEX),0)
$(foreach var,$(SPHINXDIRS), $(MAKE) PDFLATEX=xelatex LATEXOPTS="-interaction=nonstopmode" -C $(BUILDDIR)/$(var)/latex)
endif # HAVE_PDFLATEX
epubdocs:
$(call cmd,sphinx,epub)
@$(foreach var,$(SPHINXDIRS),$(call loop_cmd,sphinx,epub,$(var),epub,$(var)))
xmldocs:
$(call cmd,sphinx,xml)
@$(foreach var,$(SPHINXDIRS),$(call loop_cmd,sphinx,xml,$(var),xml,$(var)))
# no-ops for the Sphinx toolchain
sgmldocs:
@ -72,7 +99,14 @@ endif # HAVE_SPHINX
dochelp:
@echo ' Linux kernel internal documentation in different formats (Sphinx):'
@echo ' htmldocs - HTML'
@echo ' latexdocs - LaTeX'
@echo ' pdfdocs - PDF'
@echo ' epubdocs - EPUB'
@echo ' xmldocs - XML'
@echo ' cleandocs - clean all generated files'
@echo
@echo ' make SPHINXDIRS="s1 s2" [target] Generate only docs of folder s1, s2'
@echo ' valid values for SPHINXDIRS are: $(_SPHINXDIRS)'
@echo
@echo ' make SPHINX_CONF={conf-file} [target] use *additional* sphinx-build'
@echo ' configuration. This is e.g. useful to build with nit-picking config.'

154
Documentation/ManagementStyle
View File

@ -1,10 +1,12 @@
.. _managementstyle:
Linux kernel management style
Linux kernel management style
=============================
This is a short document describing the preferred (or made up, depending
on who you ask) management style for the linux kernel. It's meant to
mirror the CodingStyle document to some degree, and mainly written to
avoid answering (*) the same (or similar) questions over and over again.
avoid answering [#f1]_ the same (or similar) questions over and over again.
Management style is very personal and much harder to quantify than
simple coding style rules, so this document may or may not have anything
@ -14,50 +16,52 @@ might not actually be true. You'll have to decide for yourself.
Btw, when talking about "kernel manager", it's all about the technical
lead persons, not the people who do traditional management inside
companies. If you sign purchase orders or you have any clue about the
budget of your group, you're almost certainly not a kernel manager.
These suggestions may or may not apply to you.
budget of your group, you're almost certainly not a kernel manager.
These suggestions may or may not apply to you.
First off, I'd suggest buying "Seven Habits of Highly Effective
People", and NOT read it. Burn it, it's a great symbolic gesture.
People", and NOT read it. Burn it, it's a great symbolic gesture.
(*) This document does so not so much by answering the question, but by
making it painfully obvious to the questioner that we don't have a clue
to what the answer is.
.. [#f1] This document does so not so much by answering the question, but by
making it painfully obvious to the questioner that we don't have a clue
to what the answer is.
Anyway, here goes:
.. _decisions:
Chapter 1: Decisions
1) Decisions
------------
Everybody thinks managers make decisions, and that decision-making is
important. The bigger and more painful the decision, the bigger the
manager must be to make it. That's very deep and obvious, but it's not
actually true.
actually true.
The name of the game is to _avoid_ having to make a decision. In
The name of the game is to **avoid** having to make a decision. In
particular, if somebody tells you "choose (a) or (b), we really need you
to decide on this", you're in trouble as a manager. The people you
manage had better know the details better than you, so if they come to
you for a technical decision, you're screwed. You're clearly not
competent to make that decision for them.
competent to make that decision for them.
(Corollary:if the people you manage don't know the details better than
you, you're also screwed, although for a totally different reason.
Namely that you are in the wrong job, and that _they_ should be managing
your brilliance instead).
you, you're also screwed, although for a totally different reason.
Namely that you are in the wrong job, and that **they** should be managing
your brilliance instead).
So the name of the game is to _avoid_ decisions, at least the big and
So the name of the game is to **avoid** decisions, at least the big and
painful ones. Making small and non-consequential decisions is fine, and
makes you look like you know what you're doing, so what a kernel manager
needs to do is to turn the big and painful ones into small things where
nobody really cares.
nobody really cares.
It helps to realize that the key difference between a big decision and a
small one is whether you can fix your decision afterwards. Any decision
can be made small by just always making sure that if you were wrong (and
you _will_ be wrong), you can always undo the damage later by
you **will** be wrong), you can always undo the damage later by
backtracking. Suddenly, you get to be doubly managerial for making
_two_ inconsequential decisions - the wrong one _and_ the right one.
**two** inconsequential decisions - the wrong one **and** the right one.
And people will even see that as true leadership (*cough* bullshit
*cough*).
@ -65,10 +69,10 @@ And people will even see that as true leadership (*cough* bullshit
Thus the key to avoiding big decisions becomes to just avoiding to do
things that can't be undone. Don't get ushered into a corner from which
you cannot escape. A cornered rat may be dangerous - a cornered manager
is just pitiful.
is just pitiful.
It turns out that since nobody would be stupid enough to ever really let
a kernel manager have huge fiscal responsibility _anyway_, it's usually
a kernel manager have huge fiscal responsibility **anyway**, it's usually
fairly easy to backtrack. Since you're not going to be able to waste
huge amounts of money that you might not be able to repay, the only
thing you can backtrack on is a technical decision, and there
@ -76,113 +80,118 @@ back-tracking is very easy: just tell everybody that you were an
incompetent nincompoop, say you're sorry, and undo all the worthless
work you had people work on for the last year. Suddenly the decision
you made a year ago wasn't a big decision after all, since it could be
easily undone.
easily undone.
It turns out that some people have trouble with this approach, for two
reasons:
- admitting you were an idiot is harder than it looks. We all like to
maintain appearances, and coming out in public to say that you were
wrong is sometimes very hard indeed.
wrong is sometimes very hard indeed.
- having somebody tell you that what you worked on for the last year
wasn't worthwhile after all can be hard on the poor lowly engineers
too, and while the actual _work_ was easy enough to undo by just
too, and while the actual **work** was easy enough to undo by just
deleting it, you may have irrevocably lost the trust of that
engineer. And remember: "irrevocable" was what we tried to avoid in
the first place, and your decision ended up being a big one after
all.
all.
Happily, both of these reasons can be mitigated effectively by just
admitting up-front that you don't have a friggin' clue, and telling
people ahead of the fact that your decision is purely preliminary, and
might be the wrong thing. You should always reserve the right to change
your mind, and make people very _aware_ of that. And it's much easier
to admit that you are stupid when you haven't _yet_ done the really
your mind, and make people very **aware** of that. And it's much easier
to admit that you are stupid when you haven't **yet** done the really
stupid thing.
Then, when it really does turn out to be stupid, people just roll their
eyes and say "Oops, he did it again".
eyes and say "Oops, he did it again".
This preemptive admission of incompetence might also make the people who
actually do the work also think twice about whether it's worth doing or
not. After all, if _they_ aren't certain whether it's a good idea, you
not. After all, if **they** aren't certain whether it's a good idea, you
sure as hell shouldn't encourage them by promising them that what they
work on will be included. Make them at least think twice before they
embark on a big endeavor.
embark on a big endeavor.
Remember: they'd better know more about the details than you do, and
they usually already think they have the answer to everything. The best
thing you can do as a manager is not to instill confidence, but rather a
healthy dose of critical thinking on what they do.
healthy dose of critical thinking on what they do.
Btw, another way to avoid a decision is to plaintively just whine "can't
we just do both?" and look pitiful. Trust me, it works. If it's not
clear which approach is better, they'll eventually figure it out. The
answer may end up being that both teams get so frustrated by the
situation that they just give up.
situation that they just give up.
That may sound like a failure, but it's usually a sign that there was
something wrong with both projects, and the reason the people involved
couldn't decide was that they were both wrong. You end up coming up
smelling like roses, and you avoided yet another decision that you could
have screwed up on.
have screwed up on.
Chapter 2: People
2) People
---------
Most people are idiots, and being a manager means you'll have to deal
with it, and perhaps more importantly, that _they_ have to deal with
_you_.
with it, and perhaps more importantly, that **they** have to deal with
**you**.
It turns out that while it's easy to undo technical mistakes, it's not
as easy to undo personality disorders. You just have to live with
theirs - and yours.
theirs - and yours.
However, in order to prepare yourself as a kernel manager, it's best to
remember not to burn any bridges, bomb any innocent villagers, or
alienate too many kernel developers. It turns out that alienating people
is fairly easy, and un-alienating them is hard. Thus "alienating"
immediately falls under the heading of "not reversible", and becomes a
no-no according to Chapter 1.
no-no according to :ref:`decisions`.
There's just a few simple rules here:
(1) don't call people d*ckheads (at least not in public)
(2) learn how to apologize when you forgot rule (1)
The problem with #1 is that it's very easy to do, since you can say
"you're a d*ckhead" in millions of different ways (*), sometimes without
"you're a d*ckhead" in millions of different ways [#f2]_, sometimes without
even realizing it, and almost always with a white-hot conviction that
you are right.
you are right.
And the more convinced you are that you are right (and let's face it,
you can call just about _anybody_ a d*ckhead, and you often _will_ be
right), the harder it ends up being to apologize afterwards.
you can call just about **anybody** a d*ckhead, and you often **will** be
right), the harder it ends up being to apologize afterwards.
To solve this problem, you really only have two options:
- get really good at apologies
- spread the "love" out so evenly that nobody really ends up feeling
like they get unfairly targeted. Make it inventive enough, and they
might even be amused.
might even be amused.
The option of being unfailingly polite really doesn't exist. Nobody will
trust somebody who is so clearly hiding his true character.
(*) Paul Simon sang "Fifty Ways to Leave Your Lover", because quite
frankly, "A Million Ways to Tell a Developer He Is a D*ckhead" doesn't
scan nearly as well. But I'm sure he thought about it.
.. [#f2] Paul Simon sang "Fifty Ways to Leave Your Lover", because quite
frankly, "A Million Ways to Tell a Developer He Is a D*ckhead" doesn't
scan nearly as well. But I'm sure he thought about it.
Chapter 3: People II - the Good Kind
3) People II - the Good Kind
----------------------------
While it turns out that most people are idiots, the corollary to that is
sadly that you are one too, and that while we can all bask in the secure
knowledge that we're better than the average person (let's face it,
nobody ever believes that they're average or below-average), we should
also admit that we're not the sharpest knife around, and there will be
other people that are less of an idiot than you are.
other people that are less of an idiot than you are.
Some people react badly to smart people. Others take advantage of them.
Some people react badly to smart people. Others take advantage of them.
Make sure that you, as a kernel maintainer, are in the second group.
Make sure that you, as a kernel maintainer, are in the second group.
Suck up to them, because they are the people who will make your job
easier. In particular, they'll be able to make your decisions for you,
which is what the game is all about.
@ -191,7 +200,7 @@ So when you find somebody smarter than you are, just coast along. Your
management responsibilities largely become ones of saying "Sounds like a
good idea - go wild", or "That sounds good, but what about xxx?". The
second version in particular is a great way to either learn something
new about "xxx" or seem _extra_ managerial by pointing out something the
new about "xxx" or seem **extra** managerial by pointing out something the
smarter person hadn't thought about. In either case, you win.
One thing to look out for is to realize that greatness in one area does
@ -199,47 +208,49 @@ not necessarily translate to other areas. So you might prod people in
specific directions, but let's face it, they might be good at what they
do, and suck at everything else. The good news is that people tend to
naturally gravitate back to what they are good at, so it's not like you
are doing something irreversible when you _do_ prod them in some
are doing something irreversible when you **do** prod them in some
direction, just don't push too hard.
Chapter 4: Placing blame
4) Placing blame
----------------
Things will go wrong, and people want somebody to blame. Tag, you're it.
It's not actually that hard to accept the blame, especially if people
kind of realize that it wasn't _all_ your fault. Which brings us to the
kind of realize that it wasn't **all** your fault. Which brings us to the
best way of taking the blame: do it for another guy. You'll feel good
for taking the fall, he'll feel good about not getting blamed, and the
guy who lost his whole 36GB porn-collection because of your incompetence
will grudgingly admit that you at least didn't try to weasel out of it.
Then make the developer who really screwed up (if you can find him) know
_in_private_ that he screwed up. Not just so he can avoid it in the
**in_private** that he screwed up. Not just so he can avoid it in the
future, but so that he knows he owes you one. And, perhaps even more
importantly, he's also likely the person who can fix it. Because, let's
face it, it sure ain't you.
face it, it sure ain't you.
Taking the blame is also why you get to be manager in the first place.
Taking the blame is also why you get to be manager in the first place.
It's part of what makes people trust you, and allow you the potential
glory, because you're the one who gets to say "I screwed up". And if
you've followed the previous rules, you'll be pretty good at saying that
by now.
by now.
Chapter 5: Things to avoid
5) Things to avoid
------------------
There's one thing people hate even more than being called "d*ckhead",
and that is being called a "d*ckhead" in a sanctimonious voice. The
first you can apologize for, the second one you won't really get the
chance. They likely will no longer be listening even if you otherwise
do a good job.
do a good job.
We all think we're better than anybody else, which means that when
somebody else puts on airs, it _really_ rubs us the wrong way. You may
somebody else puts on airs, it **really** rubs us the wrong way. You may
be morally and intellectually superior to everybody around you, but
don't try to make it too obvious unless you really _intend_ to irritate
somebody (*).
don't try to make it too obvious unless you really **intend** to irritate
somebody [#f3]_.
Similarly, don't be too polite or subtle about things. Politeness easily
ends up going overboard and hiding the problem, and as they say, "On the
@ -251,15 +262,16 @@ Some humor can help pad both the bluntness and the moralizing. Going
overboard to the point of being ridiculous can drive a point home
without making it painful to the recipient, who just thinks you're being
silly. It can thus help get through the personal mental block we all
have about criticism.
have about criticism.
(*) Hint: internet newsgroups that are not directly related to your work
are great ways to take out your frustrations at other people. Write
insulting posts with a sneer just to get into a good flame every once in
a while, and you'll feel cleansed. Just don't crap too close to home.
.. [#f3] Hint: internet newsgroups that are not directly related to your work
are great ways to take out your frustrations at other people. Write
insulting posts with a sneer just to get into a good flame every once in
a while, and you'll feel cleansed. Just don't crap too close to home.
Chapter 6: Why me?
6) Why me?
----------
Since your main responsibility seems to be to take the blame for other
peoples mistakes, and make it painfully obvious to everybody else that
@ -268,9 +280,9 @@ first place?
First off, while you may or may not get screaming teenage girls (or
boys, let's not be judgmental or sexist here) knocking on your dressing
room door, you _will_ get an immense feeling of personal accomplishment
room door, you **will** get an immense feeling of personal accomplishment
for being "in charge". Never mind the fact that you're really leading
by trying to keep up with everybody else and running after them as fast
as you can. Everybody will still think you're the person in charge.
as you can. Everybody will still think you're the person in charge.
It's a great job if you can hack it.

24
Documentation/PCI/pcieaer-howto.txt
View File

@ -49,25 +49,17 @@ depends on CONFIG_PCIEPORTBUS, so pls. set CONFIG_PCIEPORTBUS=y and
CONFIG_PCIEAER = y.
2.2 Load PCI Express AER Root Driver
There is a case where a system has AER support in BIOS. Enabling the AER
Root driver and having AER support in BIOS may result unpredictable
behavior. To avoid this conflict, a successful load of the AER Root driver
requires ACPI _OSC support in the BIOS to allow the AER Root driver to
request for native control of AER. See the PCI FW 3.0 Specification for
details regarding OSC usage. Currently, lots of firmwares don't provide
_OSC support while they use PCI Express. To support such firmwares,
forceload, a parameter of type bool, could enable AER to continue to
be initiated although firmwares have no _OSC support. To enable the
walkaround, pls. add aerdriver.forceload=y to kernel boot parameter line
when booting kernel. Note that forceload=n by default.
nosourceid, another parameter of type bool, can be used when broken
hardware (mostly chipsets) has root ports that cannot obtain the reporting
source ID. nosourceid=n by default.
Some systems have AER support in firmware. Enabling Linux AER support at
the same time the firmware handles AER may result in unpredictable
behavior. Therefore, Linux does not handle AER events unless the firmware
grants AER control to the OS via the ACPI _OSC method. See the PCI FW 3.0
Specification for details regarding _OSC usage.
2.3 AER error output
When a PCI-E AER error is captured, an error message will be outputted to
console. If it's a correctable error, it is outputted as a warning.
When a PCIe AER error is captured, an error message will be output to
console. If it's a correctable error, it is output as a warning.
Otherwise, it is printed as an error. So users could choose different
log level to filter out correctable error messages.

2
Documentation/RCU/lockdep-splat.txt
View File

@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ Call Trace:
[<ffffffff817db154>] kernel_thread_helper+0x4/0x10
[<ffffffff81066430>] ? finish_task_switch+0x80/0x110
[<ffffffff817d9c04>] ? retint_restore_args+0xe/0xe
[<ffffffff81097510>] ? __init_kthread_worker+0x70/0x70
[<ffffffff81097510>] ? __kthread_init_worker+0x70/0x70
[<ffffffff817db150>] ? gs_change+0xb/0xb
Line 2776 of block/cfq-iosched.c in v3.0-rc5 is as follows:

8
Documentation/SecurityBugs
View File

@ -1,9 +1,15 @@
.. _securitybugs:
Security bugs
=============
Linux kernel developers take security very seriously. As such, we'd
like to know when a security bug is found so that it can be fixed and
disclosed as quickly as possible. Please report security bugs to the
Linux kernel security team.
1) Contact
----------
The Linux kernel security team can be contacted by email at
<security@kernel.org>. This is a private list of security officers
@ -18,6 +24,7 @@ Any exploit code is very helpful and will not be released without
consent from the reporter unless it has already been made public.
2) Disclosure
-------------
The goal of the Linux kernel security team is to work with the
bug submitter to bug resolution as well as disclosure. We prefer
@ -33,6 +40,7 @@ to a few weeks. As a basic default policy, we expect report date to
disclosure date to be on the order of 7 days.
3) Non-disclosure agreements
----------------------------
The Linux kernel security team is not a formal body and therefore unable
to enter any non-disclosure agreements.

127
Documentation/SubmitChecklist
View File

@ -1,109 +1,120 @@
.. _submitchecklist:
Linux Kernel patch submission checklist
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Here are some basic things that developers should do if they want to see their
kernel patch submissions accepted more quickly.
These are all above and beyond the documentation that is provided in
Documentation/SubmittingPatches and elsewhere regarding submitting Linux
kernel patches.
:ref:`Documentation/SubmittingPatches <submittingpatches>`
and elsewhere regarding submitting Linux kernel patches.
1: If you use a facility then #include the file that defines/declares
1) If you use a facility then #include the file that defines/declares
that facility. Don't depend on other header files pulling in ones
that you use.
2: Builds cleanly with applicable or modified CONFIG options =y, =m, and
=n. No gcc warnings/errors, no linker warnings/errors.
2) Builds cleanly:
2b: Passes allnoconfig, allmodconfig
a) with applicable or modified ``CONFIG`` options ``=y``, ``=m``, and
``=n``. No ``gcc`` warnings/errors, no linker warnings/errors.
2c: Builds successfully when using O=builddir
b) Passes ``allnoconfig``, ``allmodconfig``
3: Builds on multiple CPU architectures by using local cross-compile tools
c) Builds successfully when using ``O=builddir``
3) Builds on multiple CPU architectures by using local cross-compile tools
or some other build farm.
4: ppc64 is a good architecture for cross-compilation checking because it
tends to use `unsigned long' for 64-bit quantities.
4) ppc64 is a good architecture for cross-compilation checking because it
tends to use ``unsigned long`` for 64-bit quantities.
5: Check your patch for general style as detailed in
Documentation/CodingStyle. Check for trivial violations with the
patch style checker prior to submission (scripts/checkpatch.pl).
5) Check your patch for general style as detailed in
:ref:`Documentation/CodingStyle <codingstyle>`.
Check for trivial violations with the patch style checker prior to
submission (``scripts/checkpatch.pl``).
You should be able to justify all violations that remain in
your patch.
6: Any new or modified CONFIG options don't muck up the config menu.
6) Any new or modified ``CONFIG`` options don't muck up the config menu.
7: All new Kconfig options have help text.
7) All new ``Kconfig`` options have help text.
8: Has been carefully reviewed with respect to relevant Kconfig
8) Has been carefully reviewed with respect to relevant ``Kconfig``
combinations. This is very hard to get right with testing -- brainpower
pays off here.
9: Check cleanly with sparse.
9) Check cleanly with sparse.
10: Use 'make checkstack' and 'make namespacecheck' and fix any problems
that they find. Note: checkstack does not point out problems explicitly,
but any one function that uses more than 512 bytes on the stack is a
candidate for change.
10) Use ``make checkstack`` and ``make namespacecheck`` and fix any problems
that they find.
11: Include kernel-doc to document global kernel APIs. (Not required for
static functions, but OK there also.) Use 'make htmldocs' or 'make
mandocs' to check the kernel-doc and fix any issues.
.. note::
12: Has been tested with CONFIG_PREEMPT, CONFIG_DEBUG_PREEMPT,
CONFIG_DEBUG_SLAB, CONFIG_DEBUG_PAGEALLOC, CONFIG_DEBUG_MUTEXES,
CONFIG_DEBUG_SPINLOCK, CONFIG_DEBUG_ATOMIC_SLEEP, CONFIG_PROVE_RCU
and CONFIG_DEBUG_OBJECTS_RCU_HEAD all simultaneously enabled.
``checkstack`` does not point out problems explicitly,
but any one function that uses more than 512 bytes on the stack is a
candidate for change.
13: Has been build- and runtime tested with and without CONFIG_SMP and
CONFIG_PREEMPT.
11) Include :ref:`kernel-doc <kernel_doc>` to document global kernel APIs.
(Not required for static functions, but OK there also.) Use
``make htmldocs`` or ``make pdfdocs`` to check the
:ref:`kernel-doc <kernel_doc>` and fix any issues.
14: If the patch affects IO/Disk, etc: has been tested with and without
CONFIG_LBDAF.
12) Has been tested with ``CONFIG_PREEMPT``, ``CONFIG_DEBUG_PREEMPT``,
``CONFIG_DEBUG_SLAB``, ``CONFIG_DEBUG_PAGEALLOC``, ``CONFIG_DEBUG_MUTEXES``,
``CONFIG_DEBUG_SPINLOCK``, ``CONFIG_DEBUG_ATOMIC_SLEEP``,
``CONFIG_PROVE_RCU`` and ``CONFIG_DEBUG_OBJECTS_RCU_HEAD`` all
simultaneously enabled.
15: All codepaths have been exercised with all lockdep features enabled.
13) Has been build- and runtime tested with and without ``CONFIG_SMP`` and
``CONFIG_PREEMPT.``
16: All new /proc entries are documented under Documentation/
14) If the patch affects IO/Disk, etc: has been tested with and without
``CONFIG_LBDAF.``
17: All new kernel boot parameters are documented in
Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt.
15) All codepaths have been exercised with all lockdep features enabled.
18: All new module parameters are documented with MODULE_PARM_DESC()
16) All new ``/proc`` entries are documented under ``Documentation/``
19: All new userspace interfaces are documented in Documentation/ABI/.
See Documentation/ABI/README for more information.
17) All new kernel boot parameters are documented in
``Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt``.
18) All new module parameters are documented with ``MODULE_PARM_DESC()``
19) All new userspace interfaces are documented in ``Documentation/ABI/``.
See ``Documentation/ABI/README`` for more information.
Patches that change userspace interfaces should be CCed to
linux-api@vger.kernel.org.
20: Check that it all passes `make headers_check'.
20) Check that it all passes ``make headers_check``.
21: Has been checked with injection of at least slab and page-allocation
failures. See Documentation/fault-injection/.
21) Has been checked with injection of at least slab and page-allocation
failures. See ``Documentation/fault-injection/``.
If the new code is substantial, addition of subsystem-specific fault
injection might be appropriate.
22: Newly-added code has been compiled with `gcc -W' (use "make
EXTRA_CFLAGS=-W"). This will generate lots of noise, but is good for
finding bugs like "warning: comparison between signed and unsigned".
22) Newly-added code has been compiled with ``gcc -W`` (use
``make EXTRA_CFLAGS=-W``). This will generate lots of noise, but is good
for finding bugs like "warning: comparison between signed and unsigned".
23: Tested after it has been merged into the -mm patchset to make sure
23) Tested after it has been merged into the -mm patchset to make sure
that it still works with all of the other queued patches and various
changes in the VM, VFS, and other subsystems.
24: All memory barriers {e.g., barrier(), rmb(), wmb()} need a comment in the
source code that explains the logic of what they are doing and why.
24) All memory barriers {e.g., ``barrier()``, ``rmb()``, ``wmb()``} need a
comment in the source code that explains the logic of what they are doing
and why.
25: If any ioctl's are added by the patch, then also update
Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt.
25) If any ioctl's are added by the patch, then also update
``Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt``.
26: If your modified source code depends on or uses any of the kernel
APIs or features that are related to the following kconfig symbols,
then test multiple builds with the related kconfig symbols disabled
and/or =m (if that option is available) [not all of these at the
26) If your modified source code depends on or uses any of the kernel
APIs or features that are related to the following ``Kconfig`` symbols,
then test multiple builds with the related ``Kconfig`` symbols disabled
and/or ``=m`` (if that option is available) [not all of these at the
same time, just various/random combinations of them]:
CONFIG_SMP, CONFIG_SYSFS, CONFIG_PROC_FS, CONFIG_INPUT, CONFIG_PCI,
CONFIG_BLOCK, CONFIG_PM, CONFIG_MAGIC_SYSRQ,
CONFIG_NET, CONFIG_INET=n (but latter with CONFIG_NET=y)
``CONFIG_SMP``, ``CONFIG_SYSFS``, ``CONFIG_PROC_FS``, ``CONFIG_INPUT``, ``CONFIG_PCI``, ``CONFIG_BLOCK``, ``CONFIG_PM``, ``CONFIG_MAGIC_SYSRQ``,
``CONFIG_NET``, ``CONFIG_INET=n`` (but latter with ``CONFIG_NET=y``).

54
Documentation/SubmittingDrivers
View File

@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
.. _submittingdrivers:
Submitting Drivers For The Linux Kernel
---------------------------------------
=======================================
This document is intended to explain how to submit device drivers to the
various kernel trees. Note that if you are interested in video card drivers
@ -38,42 +40,48 @@ Linux 2.4:
maintainer does not respond or you cannot find the appropriate
maintainer then please contact Willy Tarreau <w@1wt.eu>.
Linux 2.6:
Linux 2.6 and upper:
The same rules apply as 2.4 except that you should follow linux-kernel
to track changes in API's. The final contact point for Linux 2.6
to track changes in API's. The final contact point for Linux 2.6+
submissions is Andrew Morton.
What Criteria Determine Acceptance
----------------------------------
Licensing: The code must be released to us under the
Licensing:
The code must be released to us under the
GNU General Public License. We don't insist on any kind
of exclusive GPL licensing, and if you wish the driver
to be useful to other communities such as BSD you may well
wish to release under multiple licenses.
See accepted licenses at include/linux/module.h
Copyright: The copyright owner must agree to use of GPL.
Copyright:
The copyright owner must agree to use of GPL.
It's best if the submitter and copyright owner
are the same person/entity. If not, the name of
the person/entity authorizing use of GPL should be
listed in case it's necessary to verify the will of
the copyright owner.
Interfaces: If your driver uses existing interfaces and behaves like
Interfaces:
If your driver uses existing interfaces and behaves like
other drivers in the same class it will be much more likely
to be accepted than if it invents gratuitous new ones.
If you need to implement a common API over Linux and NT
drivers do it in userspace.
Code: Please use the Linux style of code formatting as documented
in Documentation/CodingStyle. If you have sections of code
Code:
Please use the Linux style of code formatting as documented
in :ref:`Documentation/CodingStyle <codingStyle>`.
If you have sections of code
that need to be in other formats, for example because they
are shared with a windows driver kit and you want to
maintain them just once separate them out nicely and note
this fact.
Portability: Pointers are not always 32bits, not all computers are little
Portability:
Pointers are not always 32bits, not all computers are little
endian, people do not all have floating point and you
shouldn't use inline x86 assembler in your driver without
careful thought. Pure x86 drivers generally are not popular.
@ -81,12 +89,14 @@ Portability: Pointers are not always 32bits, not all computers are little
but it is easy to make sure the code can easily be made
portable.
Clarity: It helps if anyone can see how to fix the driver. It helps
Clarity:
It helps if anyone can see how to fix the driver. It helps
you because you get patches not bug reports. If you submit a
driver that intentionally obfuscates how the hardware works
it will go in the bitbucket.
PM support: Since Linux is used on many portable and desktop systems, your
PM support:
Since Linux is used on many portable and desktop systems, your
driver is likely to be used on such a system and therefore it
should support basic power management by implementing, if
necessary, the .suspend and .resume methods used during the
@ -101,7 +111,8 @@ PM support: Since Linux is used on many portable and desktop systems, your
complete overview of the power management issues related to
drivers see Documentation/power/devices.txt .
Control: In general if there is active maintenance of a driver by
Control:
In general if there is active maintenance of a driver by
the author then patches will be redirected to them unless
they are totally obvious and without need of checking.
If you want to be the contact and update point for the
@ -111,13 +122,15 @@ Control: In general if there is active maintenance of a driver by
What Criteria Do Not Determine Acceptance
-----------------------------------------
Vendor: Being the hardware vendor and maintaining the driver is
Vendor:
Being the hardware vendor and maintaining the driver is
often a good thing. If there is a stable working driver from
other people already in the tree don't expect 'we are the
vendor' to get your driver chosen. Ideally work with the
existing driver author to build a single perfect driver.
Author: It doesn't matter if a large Linux company wrote the driver,
Author:
It doesn't matter if a large Linux company wrote the driver,
or you did. Nobody has any special access to the kernel
tree. Anyone who tells you otherwise isn't telling the
whole story.
@ -127,8 +140,10 @@ Resources
---------
Linux kernel master tree:
ftp.??.kernel.org:/pub/linux/kernel/...
?? == your country code, such as "us", "uk", "fr", etc.
ftp.\ *country_code*\ .kernel.org:/pub/linux/kernel/...
where *country_code* == your country code, such as
**us**, **uk**, **fr**, etc.
http://git.kernel.org/?p=linux/kernel/git/torvalds/linux.git
@ -141,14 +156,19 @@ Linux Device Drivers, Third Edition (covers 2.6.10):
LWN.net:
Weekly summary of kernel development activity - http://lwn.net/
2.6 API changes:
http://lwn.net/Articles/2.6-kernel-api/
Porting drivers from prior kernels to 2.6:
http://lwn.net/Articles/driver-porting/
KernelNewbies:
Documentation and assistance for new kernel programmers
http://kernelnewbies.org/
http://kernelnewbies.org/
Linux USB project:
http://www.linux-usb.org/

312
Documentation/SubmittingPatches
View File

@ -1,9 +1,7 @@
.. _submittingpatches:
How to Get Your Change Into the Linux Kernel
or
Care And Operation Of Your Linus Torvalds
How to Get Your Change Into the Linux Kernel or Care And Operation Of Your Linus Torvalds
=========================================================================================
For a person or company who wishes to submit a change to the Linux
kernel, the process can sometimes be daunting if you're not familiar
@ -12,57 +10,59 @@ can greatly increase the chances of your change being accepted.
This document contains a large number of suggestions in a relatively terse
format. For detailed information on how the kernel development process
works, see Documentation/development-process. Also, read
Documentation/SubmitChecklist for a list of items to check before
works, see :ref:`Documentation/development-process <development_process_main>`.
Also, read :ref:`Documentation/SubmitChecklist <submitchecklist>`
for a list of items to check before
submitting code. If you are submitting a driver, also read
Documentation/SubmittingDrivers; for device tree binding patches, read
:ref:`Documentation/SubmittingDrivers <submittingdrivers>`;
for device tree binding patches, read
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/submitting-patches.txt.
Many of these steps describe the default behavior of the git version
control system; if you use git to prepare your patches, you'll find much
Many of these steps describe the default behavior of the ``git`` version
control system; if you use ``git`` to prepare your patches, you'll find much
of the mechanical work done for you, though you'll still need to prepare
and document a sensible set of patches. In general, use of git will make
and document a sensible set of patches. In general, use of ``git`` will make
your life as a kernel developer easier.
--------------------------------------------
SECTION 1 - CREATING AND SENDING YOUR CHANGE
--------------------------------------------
Creating and Sending your Change
********************************
0) Obtain a current source tree
-------------------------------
If you do not have a repository with the current kernel source handy, use
git to obtain one. You'll want to start with the mainline repository,
which can be grabbed with:
``git`` to obtain one. You'll want to start with the mainline repository,
which can be grabbed with::
git clone git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/torvalds/linux.git
git clone git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/torvalds/linux.git
Note, however, that you may not want to develop against the mainline tree
directly. Most subsystem maintainers run their own trees and want to see
patches prepared against those trees. See the "T:" entry for the subsystem
patches prepared against those trees. See the **T:** entry for the subsystem
in the MAINTAINERS file to find that tree, or simply ask the maintainer if
the tree is not listed there.
It is still possible to download kernel releases via tarballs (as described
in the next section), but that is the hard way to do kernel development.
1) "diff -up"
------------
1) ``diff -up``
---------------
If you must generate your patches by hand, use "diff -up" or "diff -uprN"
If you must generate your patches by hand, use ``diff -up`` or ``diff -uprN``
to create patches. Git generates patches in this form by default; if
you're using git, you can skip this section entirely.
you're using ``git``, you can skip this section entirely.
All changes to the Linux kernel occur in the form of patches, as
generated by diff(1). When creating your patch, make sure to create it
in "unified diff" format, as supplied by the '-u' argument to diff(1).
Also, please use the '-p' argument which shows which C function each
change is in - that makes the resultant diff a lot easier to read.
generated by :manpage:`diff(1)`. When creating your patch, make sure to
create it in "unified diff" format, as supplied by the ``-u`` argument
to :manpage:`diff(1)`.
Also, please use the ``-p`` argument which shows which C function each
change is in - that makes the resultant ``diff`` a lot easier to read.
Patches should be based in the root kernel source directory,
not in any lower subdirectory.
To create a patch for a single file, it is often sufficient to do:
To create a patch for a single file, it is often sufficient to do::
SRCTREE= linux
MYFILE= drivers/net/mydriver.c
@ -74,8 +74,8 @@ To create a patch for a single file, it is often sufficient to do:
diff -up $SRCTREE/$MYFILE{.orig,} > /tmp/patch
To create a patch for multiple files, you should unpack a "vanilla",
or unmodified kernel source tree, and generate a diff against your
own source tree. For example:
or unmodified kernel source tree, and generate a ``diff`` against your
own source tree. For example::
MYSRC= /devel/linux
@ -84,27 +84,27 @@ own source tree. For example:
diff -uprN -X linux-3.19-vanilla/Documentation/dontdiff \
linux-3.19-vanilla $MYSRC > /tmp/patch
"dontdiff" is a list of files which are generated by the kernel during
the build process, and should be ignored in any diff(1)-generated
``dontdiff`` is a list of files which are generated by the kernel during
the build process, and should be ignored in any :manpage:`diff(1)`-generated
patch.
Make sure your patch does not include any extra files which do not
belong in a patch submission. Make sure to review your patch -after-
generating it with diff(1), to ensure accuracy.
generating it with :manpage:`diff(1)`, to ensure accuracy.
If your changes produce a lot of deltas, you need to split them into
individual patches which modify things in logical stages; see section
#3. This will facilitate review by other kernel developers,
individual patches which modify things in logical stages; see
:ref:`split_changes`. This will facilitate review by other kernel developers,
very important if you want your patch accepted.
If you're using git, "git rebase -i" can help you with this process. If
you're not using git, quilt <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/quilt>
If you're using ``git``, ``git rebase -i`` can help you with this process. If
you're not using ``git``, ``quilt`` <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/quilt>
is another popular alternative.
.. _describe_changes:
2) Describe your changes.
-------------------------
2) Describe your changes
------------------------
Describe your problem. Whether your patch is a one-line bug fix or
5000 lines of a new feature, there must be an underlying problem that
@ -137,11 +137,11 @@ as you intend it to.
The maintainer will thank you if you write your patch description in a
form which can be easily pulled into Linux's source code management
system, git, as a "commit log". See #15, below.
system, ``git``, as a "commit log". See :ref:`explicit_in_reply_to`.
Solve only one problem per patch. If your description starts to get
long, that's a sign that you probably need to split up your patch.
See #3, next.
See :ref:`split_changes`.
When you submit or resubmit a patch or patch series, include the
complete patch description and justification for it. Don't just
@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ its behaviour.
If the patch fixes a logged bug entry, refer to that bug entry by
number and URL. If the patch follows from a mailing list discussion,
give a URL to the mailing list archive; use the https://lkml.kernel.org/
redirector with a Message-Id, to ensure that the links cannot become
redirector with a ``Message-Id``, to ensure that the links cannot become
stale.
However, try to make your explanation understandable without external
@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ patch as submitted.
If you want to refer to a specific commit, don't just refer to the
SHA-1 ID of the commit. Please also include the oneline summary of
the commit, to make it easier for reviewers to know what it is about.
Example:
Example::
Commit e21d2170f36602ae2708 ("video: remove unnecessary
platform_set_drvdata()") removed the unnecessary
@ -185,23 +185,25 @@ there is no collision with your six-character ID now, that condition may
change five years from now.
If your patch fixes a bug in a specific commit, e.g. you found an issue using
git-bisect, please use the 'Fixes:' tag with the first 12 characters of the
SHA-1 ID, and the one line summary. For example:
``git bisect``, please use the 'Fixes:' tag with the first 12 characters of
the SHA-1 ID, and the one line summary. For example::
Fixes: e21d2170f366 ("video: remove unnecessary platform_set_drvdata()")
The following git-config settings can be used to add a pretty format for
outputting the above style in the git log or git show commands
The following ``git config`` settings can be used to add a pretty format for
outputting the above style in the ``git log`` or ``git show`` commands::
[core]
abbrev = 12
[pretty]
fixes = Fixes: %h (\"%s\")
3) Separate your changes.
-------------------------
.. _split_changes:
Separate each _logical change_ into a separate patch.
3) Separate your changes
------------------------
Separate each **logical change** into a separate patch.
For example, if your changes include both bug fixes and performance
enhancements for a single driver, separate those changes into two
@ -217,12 +219,12 @@ change that can be verified by reviewers. Each patch should be justifiable
on its own merits.
If one patch depends on another patch in order for a change to be
complete, that is OK. Simply note "this patch depends on patch X"
complete, that is OK. Simply note **"this patch depends on patch X"**
in your patch description.
When dividing your change into a series of patches, take special care to
ensure that the kernel builds and runs properly after each patch in the
series. Developers using "git bisect" to track down a problem can end up
series. Developers using ``git bisect`` to track down a problem can end up
splitting your patch series at any point; they will not thank you if you
introduce bugs in the middle.
@ -231,11 +233,13 @@ then only post say 15 or so at a time and wait for review and integration.
4) Style-check your changes.
----------------------------
4) Style-check your changes
---------------------------
Check your patch for basic style violations, details of which can be
found in Documentation/CodingStyle. Failure to do so simply wastes
found in
:ref:`Documentation/CodingStyle <codingstyle>`.
Failure to do so simply wastes
the reviewers time and will get your patch rejected, probably
without even being read.
@ -260,8 +264,8 @@ You should be able to justify all violations that remain in your
patch.
5) Select the recipients for your patch.
----------------------------------------
5) Select the recipients for your patch
---------------------------------------
You should always copy the appropriate subsystem maintainer(s) on any patch
to code that they maintain; look through the MAINTAINERS file and the
@ -295,13 +299,14 @@ to allow distributors to get the patch out to users; in such cases,
obviously, the patch should not be sent to any public lists.
Patches that fix a severe bug in a released kernel should be directed
toward the stable maintainers by putting a line like this:
toward the stable maintainers by putting a line like this::
Cc: stable@vger.kernel.org
into the sign-off area of your patch (note, NOT an email recipient). You
should also read Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt in addition to this
file.
should also read
:ref:`Documentation/stable_kernel_rules.txt <stable_kernel_rules>`
in addition to this file.
Note, however, that some subsystem maintainers want to come to their own
conclusions on which patches should go to the stable trees. The networking
@ -312,28 +317,30 @@ If changes affect userland-kernel interfaces, please send the MAN-PAGES
maintainer (as listed in the MAINTAINERS file) a man-pages patch, or at
least a notification of the change, so that some information makes its way
into the manual pages. User-space API changes should also be copied to
linux-api@vger.kernel.org.
linux-api@vger.kernel.org.
For small patches you may want to CC the Trivial Patch Monkey
trivial@kernel.org which collects "trivial" patches. Have a look
into the MAINTAINERS file for its current manager.
Trivial patches must qualify for one of the following rules:
Spelling fixes in documentation
Spelling fixes for errors which could break grep(1)
Warning fixes (cluttering with useless warnings is bad)
Compilation fixes (only if they are actually correct)
Runtime fixes (only if they actually fix things)
Removing use of deprecated functions/macros
Contact detail and documentation fixes
Non-portable code replaced by portable code (even in arch-specific,
since people copy, as long as it's trivial)
Any fix by the author/maintainer of the file (ie. patch monkey
in re-transmission mode)
- Spelling fixes in documentation
- Spelling fixes for errors which could break :manpage:`grep(1)`
- Warning fixes (cluttering with useless warnings is bad)
- Compilation fixes (only if they are actually correct)
- Runtime fixes (only if they actually fix things)
- Removing use of deprecated functions/macros
- Contact detail and documentation fixes
- Non-portable code replaced by portable code (even in arch-specific,
since people copy, as long as it's trivial)
- Any fix by the author/maintainer of the file (ie. patch monkey
in re-transmission mode)
6) No MIME, no links, no compression, no attachments. Just plain text.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
6) No MIME, no links, no compression, no attachments. Just plain text
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Linus and other kernel developers need to be able to read and comment
on the changes you are submitting. It is important for a kernel
@ -341,8 +348,11 @@ developer to be able to "quote" your changes, using standard e-mail
tools, so that they may comment on specific portions of your code.
For this reason, all patches should be submitted by e-mail "inline".
WARNING: Be wary of your editor's word-wrap corrupting your patch,
if you choose to cut-n-paste your patch.
.. warning::
Be wary of your editor's word-wrap corrupting your patch,
if you choose to cut-n-paste your patch.
Do not attach the patch as a MIME attachment, compressed or not.
Many popular e-mail applications will not always transmit a MIME
@ -353,11 +363,12 @@ decreasing the likelihood of your MIME-attached change being accepted.
Exception: If your mailer is mangling patches then someone may ask
you to re-send them using MIME.
See Documentation/email-clients.txt for hints about configuring
your e-mail client so that it sends your patches untouched.
See :ref:`Documentation/email-clients.txt <email_clients>`
for hints about configuring your e-mail client so that it sends your patches
untouched.
7) E-mail size.
---------------
7) E-mail size
--------------
Large changes are not appropriate for mailing lists, and some
maintainers. If your patch, uncompressed, exceeds 300 kB in size,
@ -366,8 +377,8 @@ server, and provide instead a URL (link) pointing to your patch. But note
that if your patch exceeds 300 kB, it almost certainly needs to be broken up
anyway.
8) Respond to review comments.
------------------------------
8) Respond to review comments
-----------------------------
Your patch will almost certainly get comments from reviewers on ways in
which the patch can be improved. You must respond to those comments;
@ -382,8 +393,8 @@ reviewers sometimes get grumpy. Even in that case, though, respond
politely and address the problems they have pointed out.
9) Don't get discouraged - or impatient.
----------------------------------------
9) Don't get discouraged - or impatient
---------------------------------------
After you have submitted your change, be patient and wait. Reviewers are
busy people and may not get to your patch right away.
@ -419,9 +430,10 @@ patch, which certifies that you wrote it or otherwise have the right to
pass it on as an open-source patch. The rules are pretty simple: if you
can certify the below:
Developer's Certificate of Origin 1.1
Developer's Certificate of Origin 1.1
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
By making a contribution to this project, I certify that:
By making a contribution to this project, I certify that:
(a) The contribution was created in whole or in part by me and I
have the right to submit it under the open source license
@ -445,7 +457,7 @@ can certify the below:
maintained indefinitely and may be redistributed consistent with
this project or the open source license(s) involved.
then you just add a line saying
then you just add a line saying::
Signed-off-by: Random J Developer <random@developer.example.org>
@ -466,7 +478,7 @@ you add a line between the last Signed-off-by header and yours, indicating
the nature of your changes. While there is nothing mandatory about this, it
seems like prepending the description with your mail and/or name, all
enclosed in square brackets, is noticeable enough to make it obvious that
you are responsible for last-minute changes. Example :
you are responsible for last-minute changes. Example::
Signed-off-by: Random J Developer <random@developer.example.org>
[lucky@maintainer.example.org: struct foo moved from foo.c to foo.h]
@ -481,15 +493,15 @@ which appears in the changelog.
Special note to back-porters: It seems to be a common and useful practice
to insert an indication of the origin of a patch at the top of the commit
message (just after the subject line) to facilitate tracking. For instance,
here's what we see in a 3.x-stable release:
here's what we see in a 3.x-stable release::
Date: Tue Oct 7 07:26:38 2014 -0400
Date: Tue Oct 7 07:26:38 2014 -0400
libata: Un-break ATA blacklist
commit 1c40279960bcd7d52dbdf1d466b20d24b99176c8 upstream.
And here's what might appear in an older kernel once a patch is backported:
And here's what might appear in an older kernel once a patch is backported::
Date: Tue May 13 22:12:27 2008 +0200
@ -529,7 +541,7 @@ When in doubt people should refer to the original discussion in the mailing
list archives.
If a person has had the opportunity to comment on a patch, but has not
provided such comments, you may optionally add a "Cc:" tag to the patch.
provided such comments, you may optionally add a ``Cc:`` tag to the patch.
This is the only tag which might be added without an explicit action by the
person it names - but it should indicate that this person was copied on the
patch. This tag documents that potentially interested parties
@ -552,11 +564,12 @@ future patches, and ensures credit for the testers.
Reviewed-by:, instead, indicates that the patch has been reviewed and found
acceptable according to the Reviewer's Statement:
Reviewer's statement of oversight
Reviewer's statement of oversight
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
By offering my Reviewed-by: tag, I state that:
By offering my Reviewed-by: tag, I state that:
(a) I have carried out a technical review of this patch to
(a) I have carried out a technical review of this patch to
evaluate its appropriateness and readiness for inclusion into
the mainline kernel.
@ -594,24 +607,25 @@ A Fixes: tag indicates that the patch fixes an issue in a previous commit. It
is used to make it easy to determine where a bug originated, which can help
review a bug fix. This tag also assists the stable kernel team in determining
which stable kernel versions should receive your fix. This is the preferred
method for indicating a bug fixed by the patch. See #2 above for more details.
method for indicating a bug fixed by the patch. See :ref:`describe_changes`
for more details.
14) The canonical patch format
------------------------------
This section describes how the patch itself should be formatted. Note
that, if you have your patches stored in a git repository, proper patch
formatting can be had with "git format-patch". The tools cannot create
that, if you have your patches stored in a ``git`` repository, proper patch
formatting can be had with ``git format-patch``. The tools cannot create
the necessary text, though, so read the instructions below anyway.
The canonical patch subject line is:
The canonical patch subject line is::
Subject: [PATCH 001/123] subsystem: summary phrase
The canonical patch message body contains the following:
- A "from" line specifying the patch author (only needed if the person
- A ``from`` line specifying the patch author (only needed if the person
sending the patch is not the author).
- An empty line.
@ -619,46 +633,46 @@ The canonical patch message body contains the following:
- The body of the explanation, line wrapped at 75 columns, which will
be copied to the permanent changelog to describe this patch.
- The "Signed-off-by:" lines, described above, which will
- The ``Signed-off-by:`` lines, described above, which will
also go in the changelog.
- A marker line containing simply "---".
- A marker line containing simply ``---``.
- Any additional comments not suitable for the changelog.
- The actual patch (diff output).
- The actual patch (``diff`` output).
The Subject line format makes it very easy to sort the emails
alphabetically by subject line - pretty much any email reader will
support that - since because the sequence number is zero-padded,
the numerical and alphabetic sort is the same.
The "subsystem" in the email's Subject should identify which
The ``subsystem`` in the email's Subject should identify which
area or subsystem of the kernel is being patched.
The "summary phrase" in the email's Subject should concisely
describe the patch which that email contains. The "summary
phrase" should not be a filename. Do not use the same "summary
phrase" for every patch in a whole patch series (where a "patch
series" is an ordered sequence of multiple, related patches).
The ``summary phrase`` in the email's Subject should concisely
describe the patch which that email contains. The ``summary
phrase`` should not be a filename. Do not use the same ``summary
phrase`` for every patch in a whole patch series (where a ``patch
series`` is an ordered sequence of multiple, related patches).
Bear in mind that the "summary phrase" of your email becomes a
Bear in mind that the ``summary phrase`` of your email becomes a
globally-unique identifier for that patch. It propagates all the way
into the git changelog. The "summary phrase" may later be used in
into the ``git`` changelog. The ``summary phrase`` may later be used in
developer discussions which refer to the patch. People will want to
google for the "summary phrase" to read discussion regarding that
google for the ``summary phrase`` to read discussion regarding that
patch. It will also be the only thing that people may quickly see
when, two or three months later, they are going through perhaps
thousands of patches using tools such as "gitk" or "git log
--oneline".
thousands of patches using tools such as ``gitk`` or ``git log
--oneline``.
For these reasons, the "summary" must be no more than 70-75
For these reasons, the ``summary`` must be no more than 70-75
characters, and it must describe both what the patch changes, as well
as why the patch might be necessary. It is challenging to be both
succinct and descriptive, but that is what a well-written summary
should do.
The "summary phrase" may be prefixed by tags enclosed in square
The ``summary phrase`` may be prefixed by tags enclosed in square
brackets: "Subject: [PATCH <tag>...] <summary phrase>". The tags are
not considered part of the summary phrase, but describe how the patch
should be treated. Common tags might include a version descriptor if
@ -670,19 +684,19 @@ that developers understand the order in which the patches should be
applied and that they have reviewed or applied all of the patches in
the patch series.
A couple of example Subjects:
A couple of example Subjects::
Subject: [PATCH 2/5] ext2: improve scalability of bitmap searching
Subject: [PATCH v2 01/27] x86: fix eflags tracking
The "from" line must be the very first line in the message body,
The ``from`` line must be the very first line in the message body,
and has the form:
From: Original Author <author@example.com>
The "from" line specifies who will be credited as the author of the
patch in the permanent changelog. If the "from" line is missing,
then the "From:" line from the email header will be used to determine
The ``from`` line specifies who will be credited as the author of the
patch in the permanent changelog. If the ``from`` line is missing,
then the ``From:`` line from the email header will be used to determine
the patch author in the changelog.
The explanation body will be committed to the permanent source
@ -694,35 +708,37 @@ especially useful for people who might be searching the commit logs
looking for the applicable patch. If a patch fixes a compile failure,
it may not be necessary to include _all_ of the compile failures; just
enough that it is likely that someone searching for the patch can find
it. As in the "summary phrase", it is important to be both succinct as
it. As in the ``summary phrase``, it is important to be both succinct as
well as descriptive.
The "---" marker line serves the essential purpose of marking for patch
The ``---`` marker line serves the essential purpose of marking for patch
handling tools where the changelog message ends.
One good use for the additional comments after the "---" marker is for
a diffstat, to show what files have changed, and the number of
inserted and deleted lines per file. A diffstat is especially useful
One good use for the additional comments after the ``---`` marker is for
a ``diffstat``, to show what files have changed, and the number of
inserted and deleted lines per file. A ``diffstat`` is especially useful
on bigger patches. Other comments relevant only to the moment or the
maintainer, not suitable for the permanent changelog, should also go
here. A good example of such comments might be "patch changelogs"
here. A good example of such comments might be ``patch changelogs``
which describe what has changed between the v1 and v2 version of the
patch.
If you are going to include a diffstat after the "---" marker, please
use diffstat options "-p 1 -w 70" so that filenames are listed from
If you are going to include a ``diffstat`` after the ``---`` marker, please
use ``diffstat`` options ``-p 1 -w 70`` so that filenames are listed from
the top of the kernel source tree and don't use too much horizontal
space (easily fit in 80 columns, maybe with some indentation). (git
space (easily fit in 80 columns, maybe with some indentation). (``git``
generates appropriate diffstats by default.)
See more details on the proper patch format in the following
references.
.. _explicit_in_reply_to:
15) Explicit In-Reply-To headers
--------------------------------
It can be helpful to manually add In-Reply-To: headers to a patch
(e.g., when using "git send-email") to associate the patch with
(e.g., when using ``git send-email``) to associate the patch with
previous relevant discussion, e.g. to link a bug fix to the email with
the bug report. However, for a multi-patch series, it is generally
best to avoid using In-Reply-To: to link to older versions of the
@ -732,12 +748,12 @@ helpful, you can use the https://lkml.kernel.org/ redirector (e.g., in
the cover email text) to link to an earlier version of the patch series.
16) Sending "git pull" requests
-------------------------------
16) Sending ``git pull`` requests
---------------------------------
If you have a series of patches, it may be most convenient to have the
maintainer pull them directly into the subsystem repository with a
"git pull" operation. Note, however, that pulling patches from a developer
``git pull`` operation. Note, however, that pulling patches from a developer
requires a higher degree of trust than taking patches from a mailing list.
As a result, many subsystem maintainers are reluctant to take pull
requests, especially from new, unknown developers. If in doubt you can use
@ -746,7 +762,7 @@ series, giving the maintainer the option of using either.
A pull request should have [GIT] or [PULL] in the subject line. The
request itself should include the repository name and the branch of
interest on a single line; it should look something like:
interest on a single line; it should look something like::
Please pull from
@ -755,10 +771,10 @@ interest on a single line; it should look something like:
to get these changes:
A pull request should also include an overall message saying what will be
included in the request, a "git shortlog" listing of the patches
themselves, and a diffstat showing the overall effect of the patch series.
included in the request, a ``git shortlog`` listing of the patches
themselves, and a ``diffstat`` showing the overall effect of the patch series.
The easiest way to get all this information together is, of course, to let
git do it for you with the "git request-pull" command.
``git`` do it for you with the ``git request-pull`` command.
Some maintainers (including Linus) want to see pull requests from signed
commits; that increases their confidence that the request actually came
@ -770,8 +786,8 @@ signed by one or more core kernel developers. This step can be hard for
new developers, but there is no way around it. Attending conferences can
be a good way to find developers who can sign your key.
Once you have prepared a patch series in git that you wish to have somebody
pull, create a signed tag with "git tag -s". This will create a new tag
Once you have prepared a patch series in ``git`` that you wish to have somebody
pull, create a signed tag with ``git tag -s``. This will create a new tag
identifying the last commit in the series and containing a signature
created with your private key. You will also have the opportunity to add a
changelog-style message to the tag; this is an ideal place to describe the
@ -782,14 +798,13 @@ are working from, don't forget to push the signed tag explicitly to the
public tree.
When generating your pull request, use the signed tag as the target. A
command like this will do the trick:
command like this will do the trick::
git request-pull master git://my.public.tree/linux.git my-signed-tag
----------------------
SECTION 2 - REFERENCES
----------------------
REFERENCES
**********
Andrew Morton, "The perfect patch" (tpp).
<http://www.ozlabs.org/~akpm/stuff/tpp.txt>
@ -799,23 +814,28 @@ Jeff Garzik, "Linux kernel patch submission format".
Greg Kroah-Hartman, "How to piss off a kernel subsystem maintainer".
<http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer.html>
<http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer-02.html>
<http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer-03.html>
<http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer-04.html>
<http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer-05.html>
<http://www.kroah.com/log/linux/maintainer-06.html>
NO!!!! No more huge patch bombs to linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org people!
<https://lkml.org/lkml/2005/7/11/336>
Kernel Documentation/CodingStyle:
<Documentation/CodingStyle>
:ref:`Documentation/CodingStyle <codingstyle>`
Linus Torvalds's mail on the canonical patch format:
<http://lkml.org/lkml/2005/4/7/183>
Andi Kleen, "On submitting kernel patches"
Some strategies to get difficult or controversial changes in.
http://halobates.de/on-submitting-patches.pdf
--

7
Documentation/accounting/Makefile
View File

@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
# List of programs to build
hostprogs-y := getdelays
# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
always := $(hostprogs-y)
HOSTCFLAGS_getdelays.o += -I$(objtree)/usr/include

6
Documentation/accounting/delay-accounting.txt
View File

@ -54,9 +54,9 @@ are sent to userspace without requiring a command. If it is the last exiting
task of a thread group, the per-tgid statistics are also sent. More details
are given in the taskstats interface description.
The getdelays.c userspace utility in this directory allows simple commands to
be run and the corresponding delay statistics to be displayed. It also serves
as an example of using the taskstats interface.
The getdelays.c userspace utility in tools/accounting directory allows simple
commands to be run and the corresponding delay statistics to be displayed. It
also serves as an example of using the taskstats interface.
Usage
-----

409
Documentation/applying-patches.txt
View File

@ -1,9 +1,13 @@
.. _applying_patches:
Applying Patches To The Linux Kernel
------------------------------------
Applying Patches To The Linux Kernel
++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Original by: Jesper Juhl, August 2005
Last update: 2006-01-05
Original by:
Jesper Juhl, August 2005
Last update:
2016-09-14
A frequently asked question on the Linux Kernel Mailing List is how to apply
@ -17,10 +21,12 @@ their specific patches) is also provided.
What is a patch?
---
A patch is a small text document containing a delta of changes between two
different versions of a source tree. Patches are created with the `diff'
================
A patch is a small text document containing a delta of changes between two
different versions of a source tree. Patches are created with the ``diff``
program.
To correctly apply a patch you need to know what base it was generated from
and what new version the patch will change the source tree into. These
should both be present in the patch file metadata or be possible to deduce
@ -28,8 +34,9 @@ from the filename.
How do I apply or revert a patch?
---
You apply a patch with the `patch' program. The patch program reads a diff
=================================
You apply a patch with the ``patch`` program. The patch program reads a diff
(or patch) file and makes the changes to the source tree described in it.
Patches for the Linux kernel are generated relative to the parent directory
@ -38,26 +45,33 @@ holding the kernel source dir.
This means that paths to files inside the patch file contain the name of the
kernel source directories it was generated against (or some other directory
names like "a/" and "b/").
Since this is unlikely to match the name of the kernel source dir on your
local machine (but is often useful info to see what version an otherwise
unlabeled patch was generated against) you should change into your kernel
source directory and then strip the first element of the path from filenames
in the patch file when applying it (the -p1 argument to `patch' does this).
in the patch file when applying it (the ``-p1`` argument to ``patch`` does
this).
To revert a previously applied patch, use the -R argument to patch.
So, if you applied a patch like this:
So, if you applied a patch like this::
patch -p1 < ../patch-x.y.z
You can revert (undo) it like this:
You can revert (undo) it like this::
patch -R -p1 < ../patch-x.y.z
How do I feed a patch/diff file to `patch'?
---
This (as usual with Linux and other UNIX like operating systems) can be
How do I feed a patch/diff file to ``patch``?
=============================================
This (as usual with Linux and other UNIX like operating systems) can be
done in several different ways.
In all the examples below I feed the file (in uncompressed form) to patch
via stdin using the following syntax:
via stdin using the following syntax::
patch -p1 < path/to/patch-x.y.z
If you just want to be able to follow the examples below and don't want to
@ -65,35 +79,40 @@ know of more than one way to use patch, then you can stop reading this
section here.
Patch can also get the name of the file to use via the -i argument, like
this:
this::
patch -p1 -i path/to/patch-x.y.z
If your patch file is compressed with gzip or bzip2 and you don't want to
If your patch file is compressed with gzip or xz and you don't want to
uncompress it before applying it, then you can feed it to patch like this
instead:
zcat path/to/patch-x.y.z.gz | patch -p1
bzcat path/to/patch-x.y.z.bz2 | patch -p1
instead::
xzcat path/to/patch-x.y.z.xz | patch -p1
bzcat path/to/patch-x.y.z.gz | patch -p1
If you wish to uncompress the patch file by hand first before applying it
(what I assume you've done in the examples below), then you simply run
gunzip or bunzip2 on the file -- like this:
gunzip or xz on the file -- like this::
gunzip patch-x.y.z.gz
bunzip2 patch-x.y.z.bz2
xz -d patch-x.y.z.xz
Which will leave you with a plain text patch-x.y.z file that you can feed to
patch via stdin or the -i argument, as you prefer.
patch via stdin or the ``-i`` argument, as you prefer.
A few other nice arguments for patch are -s which causes patch to be silent
A few other nice arguments for patch are ``-s`` which causes patch to be silent
except for errors which is nice to prevent errors from scrolling out of the
screen too fast, and --dry-run which causes patch to just print a listing of
what would happen, but doesn't actually make any changes. Finally --verbose
screen too fast, and ``--dry-run`` which causes patch to just print a listing of
what would happen, but doesn't actually make any changes. Finally ``--verbose``
tells patch to print more information about the work being done.
Common errors when patching
---
When patch applies a patch file it attempts to verify the sanity of the
===========================
When patch applies a patch file it attempts to verify the sanity of the
file in different ways.
Checking that the file looks like a valid patch file and checking the code
around the bits being modified matches the context provided in the patch are
just two of the basic sanity checks patch does.
@ -111,13 +130,13 @@ everything looks good it has just moved up or down a bit, and patch will
usually adjust the line numbers and apply the patch.
Whenever patch applies a patch that it had to modify a bit to make it fit
it'll tell you about it by saying the patch applied with 'fuzz'.
it'll tell you about it by saying the patch applied with **fuzz**.
You should be wary of such changes since even though patch probably got it
right it doesn't /always/ get it right, and the result will sometimes be
wrong.
When patch encounters a change that it can't fix up with fuzz it rejects it
outright and leaves a file with a .rej extension (a reject file). You can
outright and leaves a file with a ``.rej`` extension (a reject file). You can
read this file to see exactly what change couldn't be applied, so you can
go fix it up by hand if you wish.
@ -132,43 +151,47 @@ to start with a fresh tree downloaded in full from kernel.org.
Let's look a bit more at some of the messages patch can produce.
If patch stops and presents a "File to patch:" prompt, then patch could not
If patch stops and presents a ``File to patch:`` prompt, then patch could not
find a file to be patched. Most likely you forgot to specify -p1 or you are
in the wrong directory. Less often, you'll find patches that need to be
applied with -p0 instead of -p1 (reading the patch file should reveal if
applied with ``-p0`` instead of ``-p1`` (reading the patch file should reveal if
this is the case -- if so, then this is an error by the person who created
the patch but is not fatal).
If you get "Hunk #2 succeeded at 1887 with fuzz 2 (offset 7 lines)." or a
If you get ``Hunk #2 succeeded at 1887 with fuzz 2 (offset 7 lines).`` or a
message similar to that, then it means that patch had to adjust the location
of the change (in this example it needed to move 7 lines from where it
expected to make the change to make it fit).
The resulting file may or may not be OK, depending on the reason the file
was different than expected.
This often happens if you try to apply a patch that was generated against a
different kernel version than the one you are trying to patch.
If you get a message like "Hunk #3 FAILED at 2387.", then it means that the
If you get a message like ``Hunk #3 FAILED at 2387.``, then it means that the
patch could not be applied correctly and the patch program was unable to
fuzz its way through. This will generate a .rej file with the change that
caused the patch to fail and also a .orig file showing you the original
fuzz its way through. This will generate a ``.rej`` file with the change that
caused the patch to fail and also a ``.orig`` file showing you the original
content that couldn't be changed.
If you get "Reversed (or previously applied) patch detected! Assume -R? [n]"
If you get ``Reversed (or previously applied) patch detected! Assume -R? [n]``
then patch detected that the change contained in the patch seems to have
already been made.
If you actually did apply this patch previously and you just re-applied it
in error, then just say [n]o and abort this patch. If you applied this patch
previously and actually intended to revert it, but forgot to specify -R,
then you can say [y]es here to make patch revert it for you.
then you can say [**y**]es here to make patch revert it for you.
This can also happen if the creator of the patch reversed the source and
destination directories when creating the patch, and in that case reverting
the patch will in fact apply it.
A message similar to "patch: **** unexpected end of file in patch" or "patch
unexpectedly ends in middle of line" means that patch could make no sense of
the file you fed to it. Either your download is broken, you tried to feed
patch a compressed patch file without uncompressing it first, or the patch
A message similar to ``patch: **** unexpected end of file in patch`` or
``patch unexpectedly ends in middle of line`` means that patch could make no
sense of the file you fed to it. Either your download is broken, you tried to
feed patch a compressed patch file without uncompressing it first, or the patch
file that you are using has been mangled by a mail client or mail transfer
agent along the way somewhere, e.g., by splitting a long line into two lines.
Often these warnings can easily be fixed by joining (concatenating) the
@ -182,28 +205,32 @@ to start over with a fresh download of a full kernel tree and the patch you
wish to apply.
Are there any alternatives to `patch'?
---
Yes there are alternatives.
Are there any alternatives to ``patch``?
========================================
You can use the `interdiff' program (http://cyberelk.net/tim/patchutils/) to
Yes there are alternatives.
You can use the ``interdiff`` program (http://cyberelk.net/tim/patchutils/) to
generate a patch representing the differences between two patches and then
apply the result.
This will let you move from something like 2.6.12.2 to 2.6.12.3 in a single
This will let you move from something like 4.7.2 to 4.7.3 in a single
step. The -z flag to interdiff will even let you feed it patches in gzip or
bzip2 compressed form directly without the use of zcat or bzcat or manual
decompression.
Here's how you'd go from 2.6.12.2 to 2.6.12.3 in a single step:
interdiff -z ../patch-2.6.12.2.bz2 ../patch-2.6.12.3.gz | patch -p1
Here's how you'd go from 4.7.2 to 4.7.3 in a single step::
interdiff -z ../patch-4.7.2.gz ../patch-4.7.3.gz | patch -p1
Although interdiff may save you a step or two you are generally advised to
do the additional steps since interdiff can get things wrong in some cases.
Another alternative is `ketchup', which is a python script for automatic
Another alternative is ``ketchup``, which is a python script for automatic
downloading and applying of patches (http://www.selenic.com/ketchup/).
Other nice tools are diffstat, which shows a summary of changes made by a
Other nice tools are diffstat, which shows a summary of changes made by a
patch; lsdiff, which displays a short listing of affected files in a patch
file, along with (optionally) the line numbers of the start of each patch;
and grepdiff, which displays a list of the files modified by a patch where
@ -211,99 +238,103 @@ the patch contains a given regular expression.
Where can I download the patches?
---
The patches are available at http://kernel.org/
=================================
The patches are available at http://kernel.org/
Most recent patches are linked from the front page, but they also have
specific homes.
The 2.6.x.y (-stable) and 2.6.x patches live at
ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/v2.6/
The 4.x.y (-stable) and 4.x patches live at
ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/v4.x/
The -rc patches live at
ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/v2.6/testing/
The -git patches live at
ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/v2.6/snapshots/
ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/v4.x/testing/
The -mm kernels live at
ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/akpm/patches/2.6/
In place of ftp.kernel.org you can use ftp.cc.kernel.org, where cc is a
In place of ``ftp.kernel.org`` you can use ``ftp.cc.kernel.org``, where cc is a
country code. This way you'll be downloading from a mirror site that's most
likely geographically closer to you, resulting in faster downloads for you,
less bandwidth used globally and less load on the main kernel.org servers --
these are good things, so do use mirrors when possible.
The 2.6.x kernels
---
These are the base stable releases released by Linus. The highest numbered
The 4.x kernels
===============
These are the base stable releases released by Linus. The highest numbered
release is the most recent.
If regressions or other serious flaws are found, then a -stable fix patch
will be released (see below) on top of this base. Once a new 2.6.x base
will be released (see below) on top of this base. Once a new 4.x base
kernel is released, a patch is made available that is a delta between the
previous 2.6.x kernel and the new one.
previous 4.x kernel and the new one.
To apply a patch moving from 2.6.11 to 2.6.12, you'd do the following (note
that such patches do *NOT* apply on top of 2.6.x.y kernels but on top of the
base 2.6.x kernel -- if you need to move from 2.6.x.y to 2.6.x+1 you need to
first revert the 2.6.x.y patch).
To apply a patch moving from 4.6 to 4.7, you'd do the following (note
that such patches do **NOT** apply on top of 4.x.y kernels but on top of the
base 4.x kernel -- if you need to move from 4.x.y to 4.x+1 you need to
first revert the 4.x.y patch).
Here are some examples:
Here are some examples::
# moving from 2.6.11 to 2.6.12
$ cd ~/linux-2.6.11 # change to kernel source dir
$ patch -p1 < ../patch-2.6.12 # apply the 2.6.12 patch
$ cd ..
$ mv linux-2.6.11 linux-2.6.12 # rename source dir
# moving from 4.6 to 4.7
# moving from 2.6.11.1 to 2.6.12
$ cd ~/linux-2.6.11.1 # change to kernel source dir
$ patch -p1 -R < ../patch-2.6.11.1 # revert the 2.6.11.1 patch
# source dir is now 2.6.11
$ patch -p1 < ../patch-2.6.12 # apply new 2.6.12 patch
$ cd ..
$ mv linux-2.6.11.1 linux-2.6.12 # rename source dir
$ cd ~/linux-4.6 # change to kernel source dir
$ patch -p1 < ../patch-4.7 # apply the 4.7 patch
$ cd ..
$ mv linux-4.6 linux-4.7 # rename source dir
# moving from 4.6.1 to 4.7
$ cd ~/linux-4.6.1 # change to kernel source dir
$ patch -p1 -R < ../patch-4.6.1 # revert the 4.6.1 patch
# source dir is now 4.6
$ patch -p1 < ../patch-4.7 # apply new 4.7 patch
$ cd ..
$ mv linux-4.6.1 linux-4.7 # rename source dir
The 2.6.x.y kernels
---
Kernels with 4-digit versions are -stable kernels. They contain small(ish)
The 4.x.y kernels
=================
Kernels with 3-digit versions are -stable kernels. They contain small(ish)
critical fixes for security problems or significant regressions discovered
in a given 2.6.x kernel.
in a given 4.x kernel.
This is the recommended branch for users who want the most recent stable
kernel and are not interested in helping test development/experimental
versions.
If no 2.6.x.y kernel is available, then the highest numbered 2.6.x kernel is
If no 4.x.y kernel is available, then the highest numbered 4.x kernel is
the current stable kernel.
note: the -stable team usually do make incremental patches available as well
.. note::
The -stable team usually do make incremental patches available as well
as patches against the latest mainline release, but I only cover the
non-incremental ones below. The incremental ones can be found at
ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/v2.6/incr/
ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/v4.x/incr/
These patches are not incremental, meaning that for example the 2.6.12.3
patch does not apply on top of the 2.6.12.2 kernel source, but rather on top
of the base 2.6.12 kernel source .
So, in order to apply the 2.6.12.3 patch to your existing 2.6.12.2 kernel
source you have to first back out the 2.6.12.2 patch (so you are left with a
base 2.6.12 kernel source) and then apply the new 2.6.12.3 patch.
These patches are not incremental, meaning that for example the 4.7.3
patch does not apply on top of the 4.7.2 kernel source, but rather on top
of the base 4.7 kernel source.
Here's a small example:
So, in order to apply the 4.7.3 patch to your existing 4.7.2 kernel
source you have to first back out the 4.7.2 patch (so you are left with a
base 4.7 kernel source) and then apply the new 4.7.3 patch.
$ cd ~/linux-2.6.12.2 # change into the kernel source dir
$ patch -p1 -R < ../patch-2.6.12.2 # revert the 2.6.12.2 patch
$ patch -p1 < ../patch-2.6.12.3 # apply the new 2.6.12.3 patch
$ cd ..
$ mv linux-2.6.12.2 linux-2.6.12.3 # rename the kernel source dir
Here's a small example::
$ cd ~/linux-4.7.2 # change to the kernel source dir
$ patch -p1 -R < ../patch-4.7.2 # revert the 4.7.2 patch
$ patch -p1 < ../patch-4.7.3 # apply the new 4.7.3 patch
$ cd ..
$ mv linux-4.7.2 linux-4.7.3 # rename the kernel source dir
The -rc kernels
---
These are release-candidate kernels. These are development kernels released
===============
These are release-candidate kernels. These are development kernels released
by Linus whenever he deems the current git (the kernel's source management
tool) tree to be in a reasonably sane state adequate for testing.
@ -317,39 +348,44 @@ This is a good branch to run for people who want to help out testing
development kernels but do not want to run some of the really experimental
stuff (such people should see the sections about -git and -mm kernels below).
The -rc patches are not incremental, they apply to a base 2.6.x kernel, just
like the 2.6.x.y patches described above. The kernel version before the -rcN
The -rc patches are not incremental, they apply to a base 4.x kernel, just
like the 4.x.y patches described above. The kernel version before the -rcN
suffix denotes the version of the kernel that this -rc kernel will eventually
turn into.
So, 2.6.13-rc5 means that this is the fifth release candidate for the 2.6.13
kernel and the patch should be applied on top of the 2.6.12 kernel source.
Here are 3 examples of how to apply these patches:
So, 4.8-rc5 means that this is the fifth release candidate for the 4.8
kernel and the patch should be applied on top of the 4.7 kernel source.
# first an example of moving from 2.6.12 to 2.6.13-rc3
$ cd ~/linux-2.6.12 # change into the 2.6.12 source dir
$ patch -p1 < ../patch-2.6.13-rc3 # apply the 2.6.13-rc3 patch
$ cd ..
$ mv linux-2.6.12 linux-2.6.13-rc3 # rename the source dir
Here are 3 examples of how to apply these patches::
# now let's move from 2.6.13-rc3 to 2.6.13-rc5
$ cd ~/linux-2.6.13-rc3 # change into the 2.6.13-rc3 dir
$ patch -p1 -R < ../patch-2.6.13-rc3 # revert the 2.6.13-rc3 patch
$ patch -p1 < ../patch-2.6.13-rc5 # apply the new 2.6.13-rc5 patch
$ cd ..
$ mv linux-2.6.13-rc3 linux-2.6.13-rc5 # rename the source dir
# first an example of moving from 4.7 to 4.8-rc3
# finally let's try and move from 2.6.12.3 to 2.6.13-rc5
$ cd ~/linux-2.6.12.3 # change to the kernel source dir
$ patch -p1 -R < ../patch-2.6.12.3 # revert the 2.6.12.3 patch
$ patch -p1 < ../patch-2.6.13-rc5 # apply new 2.6.13-rc5 patch
$ cd ..
$ mv linux-2.6.12.3 linux-2.6.13-rc5 # rename the kernel source dir
$ cd ~/linux-4.7 # change to the 4.7 source dir
$ patch -p1 < ../patch-4.8-rc3 # apply the 4.8-rc3 patch
$ cd ..
$ mv linux-4.7 linux-4.8-rc3 # rename the source dir
# now let's move from 4.8-rc3 to 4.8-rc5
$ cd ~/linux-4.8-rc3 # change to the 4.8-rc3 dir
$ patch -p1 -R < ../patch-4.8-rc3 # revert the 4.8-rc3 patch
$ patch -p1 < ../patch-4.8-rc5 # apply the new 4.8-rc5 patch
$ cd ..
$ mv linux-4.8-rc3 linux-4.8-rc5 # rename the source dir
# finally let's try and move from 4.7.3 to 4.8-rc5
$ cd ~/linux-4.7.3 # change to the kernel source dir
$ patch -p1 -R < ../patch-4.7.3 # revert the 4.7.3 patch
$ patch -p1 < ../patch-4.8-rc5 # apply new 4.8-rc5 patch
$ cd ..
$ mv linux-4.7.3 linux-4.8-rc5 # rename the kernel source dir
The -git kernels
---
These are daily snapshots of Linus' kernel tree (managed in a git
================
These are daily snapshots of Linus' kernel tree (managed in a git
repository, hence the name).
These patches are usually released daily and represent the current state of
@ -357,91 +393,66 @@ Linus's tree. They are more experimental than -rc kernels since they are
generated automatically without even a cursory glance to see if they are
sane.
-git patches are not incremental and apply either to a base 2.6.x kernel or
a base 2.6.x-rc kernel -- you can see which from their name.
A patch named 2.6.12-git1 applies to the 2.6.12 kernel source and a patch
named 2.6.13-rc3-git2 applies to the source of the 2.6.13-rc3 kernel.
-git patches are not incremental and apply either to a base 4.x kernel or
a base 4.x-rc kernel -- you can see which from their name.
A patch named 4.7-git1 applies to the 4.7 kernel source and a patch
named 4.8-rc3-git2 applies to the source of the 4.8-rc3 kernel.
Here are some examples of how to apply these patches:
Here are some examples of how to apply these patches::
# moving from 2.6.12 to 2.6.12-git1
$ cd ~/linux-2.6.12 # change to the kernel source dir
$ patch -p1 < ../patch-2.6.12-git1 # apply the 2.6.12-git1 patch
$ cd ..
$ mv linux-2.6.12 linux-2.6.12-git1 # rename the kernel source dir
# moving from 4.7 to 4.7-git1
# moving from 2.6.12-git1 to 2.6.13-rc2-git3
$ cd ~/linux-2.6.12-git1 # change to the kernel source dir
$ patch -p1 -R < ../patch-2.6.12-git1 # revert the 2.6.12-git1 patch
# we now have a 2.6.12 kernel
$ patch -p1 < ../patch-2.6.13-rc2 # apply the 2.6.13-rc2 patch
# the kernel is now 2.6.13-rc2
$ patch -p1 < ../patch-2.6.13-rc2-git3 # apply the 2.6.13-rc2-git3 patch
# the kernel is now 2.6.13-rc2-git3
$ cd ..
$ mv linux-2.6.12-git1 linux-2.6.13-rc2-git3 # rename source dir
$ cd ~/linux-4.7 # change to the kernel source dir
$ patch -p1 < ../patch-4.7-git1 # apply the 4.7-git1 patch
$ cd ..
$ mv linux-4.7 linux-4.7-git1 # rename the kernel source dir
# moving from 4.7-git1 to 4.8-rc2-git3
$ cd ~/linux-4.7-git1 # change to the kernel source dir
$ patch -p1 -R < ../patch-4.7-git1 # revert the 4.7-git1 patch
# we now have a 4.7 kernel
$ patch -p1 < ../patch-4.8-rc2 # apply the 4.8-rc2 patch
# the kernel is now 4.8-rc2
$ patch -p1 < ../patch-4.8-rc2-git3 # apply the 4.8-rc2-git3 patch
# the kernel is now 4.8-rc2-git3
$ cd ..
$ mv linux-4.7-git1 linux-4.8-rc2-git3 # rename source dir
The -mm kernels
---
These are experimental kernels released by Andrew Morton.
The -mm patches and the linux-next tree
=======================================
The -mm tree serves as a sort of proving ground for new features and other
experimental patches.
Once a patch has proved its worth in -mm for a while Andrew pushes it on to
Linus for inclusion in mainline.
The -mm patches are experimental patches released by Andrew Morton.
Although it's encouraged that patches flow to Linus via the -mm tree, this
is not always enforced.
Subsystem maintainers (or individuals) sometimes push their patches directly
to Linus, even though (or after) they have been merged and tested in -mm (or
sometimes even without prior testing in -mm).
In the past, -mm tree were used to also test subsystem patches, but this
function is now done via the
:ref:`linux-next <https://www.kernel.org/doc/man-pages/linux-next.html>`
tree. The Subsystem maintainers push their patches first to linux-next,
and, during the merge window, sends them directly to Linus.
You should generally strive to get your patches into mainline via -mm to
ensure maximum testing.
The -mm patches serve as a sort of proving ground for new features and other
experimental patches that aren't merged via a subsystem tree.
Once such patches has proved its worth in -mm for a while Andrew pushes
it on to Linus for inclusion in mainline.
This branch is in constant flux and contains many experimental features, a
The linux-next tree is daily updated, and includes the -mm patches.
Both are in constant flux and contains many experimental features, a
lot of debugging patches not appropriate for mainline etc., and is the most
experimental of the branches described in this document.
These kernels are not appropriate for use on systems that are supposed to be
These patches are not appropriate for use on systems that are supposed to be
stable and they are more risky to run than any of the other branches (make
sure you have up-to-date backups -- that goes for any experimental kernel but
even more so for -mm kernels).
even more so for -mm patches or using a Kernel from the linux-next tree).
These kernels in addition to all the other experimental patches they contain
usually also contain any changes in the mainline -git kernels available at
the time of release.
Testing of -mm patches and linux-next is greatly appreciated since the whole
point of those are to weed out regressions, crashes, data corruption bugs,
build breakage (and any other bug in general) before changes are merged into
the more stable mainline Linus tree.
Testing of -mm kernels is greatly appreciated since the whole point of the
tree is to weed out regressions, crashes, data corruption bugs, build
breakage (and any other bug in general) before changes are merged into the
more stable mainline Linus tree.
But testers of -mm should be aware that breakage in this tree is more common
than in any other tree.
The -mm kernels are not released on a fixed schedule, but usually a few -mm
kernels are released in between each -rc kernel (1 to 3 is common).
The -mm kernels apply to either a base 2.6.x kernel (when no -rc kernels
have been released yet) or to a Linus -rc kernel.
Here are some examples of applying the -mm patches:
# moving from 2.6.12 to 2.6.12-mm1
$ cd ~/linux-2.6.12 # change to the 2.6.12 source dir
$ patch -p1 < ../2.6.12-mm1 # apply the 2.6.12-mm1 patch
$ cd ..
$ mv linux-2.6.12 linux-2.6.12-mm1 # rename the source appropriately
# moving from 2.6.12-mm1 to 2.6.13-rc3-mm3
$ cd ~/linux-2.6.12-mm1
$ patch -p1 -R < ../2.6.12-mm1 # revert the 2.6.12-mm1 patch
# we now have a 2.6.12 source
$ patch -p1 < ../patch-2.6.13-rc3 # apply the 2.6.13-rc3 patch
# we now have a 2.6.13-rc3 source
$ patch -p1 < ../2.6.13-rc3-mm3 # apply the 2.6.13-rc3-mm3 patch
$ cd ..
$ mv linux-2.6.12-mm1 linux-2.6.13-rc3-mm3 # rename the source dir
But testers of -mm and linux-next should be aware that breakages are
more common than in any other tree.
This concludes this list of explanations of the various kernel trees.

2
Documentation/arm/00-INDEX
View File

@ -8,8 +8,6 @@ Interrupts
- ARM Interrupt subsystem documentation
IXP4xx
- Intel IXP4xx Network processor.
Makefile
- Build sourcefiles as part of the Documentation-build for arm
Netwinder
- Netwinder specific documentation
Porting

13
Documentation/arm/sunxi/README
View File

@ -31,6 +31,8 @@ SunXi family
+ User Manual
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A13/A13%20User%20Manual%20-%20v1.2%20%282013-01-08%29.pdf
- Next Thing Co GR8 (sun5i)
* Dual ARM Cortex-A7 based SoCs
- Allwinner A20 (sun7i)
+ User Manual
@ -73,4 +75,13 @@ SunXi family
* Octa ARM Cortex-A7 based SoCs
- Allwinner A83T
+ Datasheet
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A83T/A83T_datasheet_Revision_1.1.pdf
https://github.com/allwinner-zh/documents/raw/master/A83T/A83T_Datasheet_v1.3_20150510.pdf
+ User Manual
https://github.com/allwinner-zh/documents/raw/master/A83T/A83T_User_Manual_v1.5.1_20150513.pdf
* Quad ARM Cortex-A53 based SoCs
- Allwinner A64
+ Datasheet
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A64/A64_Datasheet_V1.1.pdf
+ User Manual
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A64/Allwinner%20A64%20User%20Manual%20v1.0.pdf

7
Documentation/auxdisplay/Makefile
View File

@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
# List of programs to build
hostprogs-y := cfag12864b-example
# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
always := $(hostprogs-y)
HOSTCFLAGS_cfag12864b-example.o += -I$(objtree)/usr/include

2
Documentation/auxdisplay/cfag12864b
View File

@ -101,5 +101,5 @@ Although the LCD won't get updated until the next refresh time arrives.
Also, you can mmap the framebuffer: open & mmap, munmap & close...
which is the best option for most uses.
Check Documentation/auxdisplay/cfag12864b-example.c
Check samples/auxdisplay/cfag12864b-example.c
for a real working userspace complete program with usage examples.

4
Documentation/blackfin/00-INDEX
View File

@ -1,10 +1,6 @@
00-INDEX
- This file
Makefile
- Makefile for gptimers example file.
bfin-gpio-notes.txt
- Notes in developing/using bfin-gpio driver.
bfin-spi-notes.txt
- Notes for using bfin spi bus driver.
gptimers-example.c
- gptimers example

5
Documentation/blackfin/Makefile
View File

@ -1,5 +0,0 @@
ifneq ($(CONFIG_BLACKFIN),)
ifneq ($(CONFIG_BFIN_GPTIMERS),)
obj-m := gptimers-example.o
endif
endif

4
Documentation/block/biodoc.txt
View File

@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ i. Per-queue limits/values exported to the generic layer by the driver
Various parameters that the generic i/o scheduler logic uses are set at
a per-queue level (e.g maximum request size, maximum number of segments in
a scatter-gather list, hardsect size)
a scatter-gather list, logical block size)
Some parameters that were earlier available as global arrays indexed by
major/minor are now directly associated with the queue. Some of these may
@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ Some new queue property settings:
blk_queue_max_segment_size(q, max_seg_size)
Maximum size of a clustered segment, 64kB default.
blk_queue_hardsect_size(q, hardsect_size)
blk_queue_logical_block_size(q, logical_block_size)
Lowest possible sector size that the hardware can operate
on, 512 bytes default.

42
Documentation/clk.txt
View File

@ -31,24 +31,25 @@ serve as a convenient shorthand for the implementation of the
hardware-specific bits for the hypothetical "foo" hardware.
Tying the two halves of this interface together is struct clk_hw, which
is defined in struct clk_foo and pointed to within struct clk. This
is defined in struct clk_foo and pointed to within struct clk_core. This
allows for easy navigation between the two discrete halves of the common
clock interface.
Part 2 - common data structures and api
Below is the common struct clk definition from
include/linux/clk-private.h, modified for brevity:
Below is the common struct clk_core definition from
drivers/clk/clk.c, modified for brevity:
struct clk {
struct clk_core {
const char *name;
const struct clk_ops *ops;
struct clk_hw *hw;
char **parent_names;
struct clk **parents;
struct clk *parent;
struct hlist_head children;
struct hlist_node child_node;
struct module *owner;
struct clk_core *parent;
const char **parent_names;
struct clk_core **parents;
u8 num_parents;
u8 new_parent_index;
...
};
@ -56,16 +57,19 @@ The members above make up the core of the clk tree topology. The clk
api itself defines several driver-facing functions which operate on
struct clk. That api is documented in include/linux/clk.h.
Platforms and devices utilizing the common struct clk use the struct
clk_ops pointer in struct clk to perform the hardware-specific parts of
the operations defined in clk.h:
Platforms and devices utilizing the common struct clk_core use the struct
clk_ops pointer in struct clk_core to perform the hardware-specific parts of
the operations defined in clk-provider.h:
struct clk_ops {
int (*prepare)(struct clk_hw *hw);
void (*unprepare)(struct clk_hw *hw);
int (*is_prepared)(struct clk_hw *hw);
void (*unprepare_unused)(struct clk_hw *hw);
int (*enable)(struct clk_hw *hw);
void (*disable)(struct clk_hw *hw);
int (*is_enabled)(struct clk_hw *hw);
void (*disable_unused)(struct clk_hw *hw);
unsigned long (*recalc_rate)(struct clk_hw *hw,
unsigned long parent_rate);
long (*round_rate)(struct clk_hw *hw,
@ -84,6 +88,8 @@ the operations defined in clk.h:
u8 index);
unsigned long (*recalc_accuracy)(struct clk_hw *hw,
unsigned long parent_accuracy);
int (*get_phase)(struct clk_hw *hw);
int (*set_phase)(struct clk_hw *hw, int degrees);
void (*init)(struct clk_hw *hw);
int (*debug_init)(struct clk_hw *hw,
struct dentry *dentry);
@ -91,7 +97,7 @@ the operations defined in clk.h:
Part 3 - hardware clk implementations
The strength of the common struct clk comes from its .ops and .hw pointers
The strength of the common struct clk_core comes from its .ops and .hw pointers
which abstract the details of struct clk from the hardware-specific bits, and
vice versa. To illustrate consider the simple gateable clk implementation in
drivers/clk/clk-gate.c:
@ -107,7 +113,7 @@ struct clk_gate contains struct clk_hw hw as well as hardware-specific
knowledge about which register and bit controls this clk's gating.
Nothing about clock topology or accounting, such as enable_count or
notifier_count, is needed here. That is all handled by the common
framework code and struct clk.
framework code and struct clk_core.
Let's walk through enabling this clk from driver code:
@ -139,22 +145,18 @@ static void clk_gate_set_bit(struct clk_gate *gate)
Note that to_clk_gate is defined as:
#define to_clk_gate(_hw) container_of(_hw, struct clk_gate, clk)
#define to_clk_gate(_hw) container_of(_hw, struct clk_gate, hw)
This pattern of abstraction is used for every clock hardware
representation.
Part 4 - supporting your own clk hardware
When implementing support for a new type of clock it only necessary to
When implementing support for a new type of clock it is only necessary to
include the following header:
#include <linux/clk-provider.h>
include/linux/clk.h is included within that header and clk-private.h
must never be included from the code which implements the operations for
a clock. More on that below in Part 5.
To construct a clk hardware structure for your platform you must define
the following:

106
Documentation/conf.py
View File

@ -14,11 +14,17 @@
import sys
import os
import sphinx
# Get Sphinx version
major, minor, patch = map(int, sphinx.__version__.split("."))
# If extensions (or modules to document with autodoc) are in another directory,
# add these directories to sys.path here. If the directory is relative to the
# documentation root, use os.path.abspath to make it absolute, like shown here.
sys.path.insert(0, os.path.abspath('sphinx'))
from load_config import loadConfig
# -- General configuration ------------------------------------------------
@ -28,14 +34,13 @@ sys.path.insert(0, os.path.abspath('sphinx'))
# Add any Sphinx extension module names here, as strings. They can be
# extensions coming with Sphinx (named 'sphinx.ext.*') or your custom
# ones.
extensions = ['kernel-doc', 'rstFlatTable', 'kernel_include']
extensions = ['kernel-doc', 'rstFlatTable', 'kernel_include', 'cdomain']
# Gracefully handle missing rst2pdf.
try:
import rst2pdf
extensions += ['rst2pdf.pdfbuilder']
except ImportError:
pass
# The name of the math extension changed on Sphinx 1.4
if minor > 3:
extensions.append("sphinx.ext.imgmath")
else:
extensions.append("sphinx.ext.pngmath")
# Add any paths that contain templates here, relative to this directory.
templates_path = ['_templates']
@ -252,23 +257,92 @@ htmlhelp_basename = 'TheLinuxKerneldoc'
latex_elements = {
# The paper size ('letterpaper' or 'a4paper').
#'papersize': 'letterpaper',
'papersize': 'a4paper',
# The font size ('10pt', '11pt' or '12pt').
#'pointsize': '10pt',
# Additional stuff for the LaTeX preamble.
#'preamble': '',
'pointsize': '8pt',
# Latex figure (float) alignment
#'figure_align': 'htbp',
# Don't mangle with UTF-8 chars
'inputenc': '',
'utf8extra': '',
# Additional stuff for the LaTeX preamble.
'preamble': '''
% Adjust margins
\\usepackage[margin=0.5in, top=1in, bottom=1in]{geometry}
% Allow generate some pages in landscape
\\usepackage{lscape}
% Put notes in color and let them be inside a table
\\definecolor{NoteColor}{RGB}{204,255,255}
\\definecolor{WarningColor}{RGB}{255,204,204}
\\definecolor{AttentionColor}{RGB}{255,255,204}
\\definecolor{OtherColor}{RGB}{204,204,204}
\\newlength{\\mynoticelength}
\\makeatletter\\newenvironment{coloredbox}[1]{%
\\setlength{\\fboxrule}{1pt}
\\setlength{\\fboxsep}{7pt}
\\setlength{\\mynoticelength}{\\linewidth}
\\addtolength{\\mynoticelength}{-2\\fboxsep}
\\addtolength{\\mynoticelength}{-2\\fboxrule}
\\begin{lrbox}{\\@tempboxa}\\begin{minipage}{\\mynoticelength}}{\\end{minipage}\\end{lrbox}%
\\ifthenelse%
{\\equal{\\py@noticetype}{note}}%
{\\colorbox{NoteColor}{\\usebox{\\@tempboxa}}}%
{%
\\ifthenelse%
{\\equal{\\py@noticetype}{warning}}%
{\\colorbox{WarningColor}{\\usebox{\\@tempboxa}}}%
{%
\\ifthenelse%
{\\equal{\\py@noticetype}{attention}}%
{\\colorbox{AttentionColor}{\\usebox{\\@tempboxa}}}%
{\\colorbox{OtherColor}{\\usebox{\\@tempboxa}}}%
}%
}%
}\\makeatother
\\makeatletter
\\renewenvironment{notice}[2]{%
\\def\\py@noticetype{#1}
\\begin{coloredbox}{#1}
\\bf\\it
\\par\\strong{#2}
\\csname py@noticestart@#1\\endcsname
}
{
\\csname py@noticeend@\\py@noticetype\\endcsname
\\end{coloredbox}
}
\\makeatother
% Use some font with UTF-8 support with XeLaTeX
\\usepackage{fontspec}
\\setsansfont{DejaVu Serif}
\\setromanfont{DejaVu Sans}
\\setmonofont{DejaVu Sans Mono}
% To allow adjusting table sizes
\\usepackage{adjustbox}
'''
}
# Grouping the document tree into LaTeX files. List of tuples
# (source start file, target name, title,
# author, documentclass [howto, manual, or own class]).
latex_documents = [
(master_doc, 'TheLinuxKernel.tex', 'The Linux Kernel Documentation',
('kernel-documentation', 'kernel-documentation.tex', 'The Linux Kernel Documentation',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
('development-process/index', 'development-process.tex', 'Linux Kernel Development Documentation',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
('gpu/index', 'gpu.tex', 'Linux GPU Driver Developer\'s Guide',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
('media/index', 'media.tex', 'Linux Media Subsystem Documentation',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
]
@ -419,3 +493,9 @@ pdf_documents = [
# line arguments.
kerneldoc_bin = '../scripts/kernel-doc'
kerneldoc_srctree = '..'
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Since loadConfig overwrites settings from the global namespace, it has to be
# the last statement in the conf.py file
# ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
loadConfig(globals())

359
Documentation/coccinelle.txt → Documentation/dev-tools/coccinelle.rst
View File

@ -1,10 +1,18 @@
Copyright 2010 Nicolas Palix <npalix@diku.dk>
Copyright 2010 Julia Lawall <julia@diku.dk>
Copyright 2010 Gilles Muller <Gilles.Muller@lip6.fr>
.. Copyright 2010 Nicolas Palix <npalix@diku.dk>
.. Copyright 2010 Julia Lawall <julia@diku.dk>
.. Copyright 2010 Gilles Muller <Gilles.Muller@lip6.fr>
.. highlight:: none
Getting Coccinelle
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Coccinelle
==========
Coccinelle is a tool for pattern matching and text transformation that has
many uses in kernel development, including the application of complex,
tree-wide patches and detection of problematic programming patterns.
Getting Coccinelle
-------------------
The semantic patches included in the kernel use features and options
which are provided by Coccinelle version 1.0.0-rc11 and above.
@ -22,24 +30,23 @@ of many distributions, e.g. :
- NetBSD
- FreeBSD
You can get the latest version released from the Coccinelle homepage at
http://coccinelle.lip6.fr/
Information and tips about Coccinelle are also provided on the wiki
pages at http://cocci.ekstranet.diku.dk/wiki/doku.php
Once you have it, run the following command:
Once you have it, run the following command::
./configure
make
as a regular user, and install it with
as a regular user, and install it with::
sudo make install
Supplemental documentation
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Supplemental documentation
---------------------------
For supplemental documentation refer to the wiki:
@ -47,49 +54,52 @@ https://bottest.wiki.kernel.org/coccicheck
The wiki documentation always refers to the linux-next version of the script.
Using Coccinelle on the Linux kernel
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Using Coccinelle on the Linux kernel
------------------------------------
A Coccinelle-specific target is defined in the top level
Makefile. This target is named 'coccicheck' and calls the 'coccicheck'
front-end in the 'scripts' directory.
Makefile. This target is named ``coccicheck`` and calls the ``coccicheck``
front-end in the ``scripts`` directory.
Four basic modes are defined: patch, report, context, and org. The mode to
use is specified by setting the MODE variable with 'MODE=<mode>'.
Four basic modes are defined: ``patch``, ``report``, ``context``, and
``org``. The mode to use is specified by setting the MODE variable with
``MODE=<mode>``.
'patch' proposes a fix, when possible.
- ``patch`` proposes a fix, when possible.
'report' generates a list in the following format:
- ``report`` generates a list in the following format:
file:line:column-column: message
'context' highlights lines of interest and their context in a
diff-like style.Lines of interest are indicated with '-'.
- ``context`` highlights lines of interest and their context in a
diff-like style.Lines of interest are indicated with ``-``.
'org' generates a report in the Org mode format of Emacs.
- ``org`` generates a report in the Org mode format of Emacs.
Note that not all semantic patches implement all modes. For easy use
of Coccinelle, the default mode is "report".
Two other modes provide some common combinations of these modes.
'chain' tries the previous modes in the order above until one succeeds.
- ``chain`` tries the previous modes in the order above until one succeeds.
'rep+ctxt' runs successively the report mode and the context mode.
It should be used with the C option (described later)
which checks the code on a file basis.
- ``rep+ctxt`` runs successively the report mode and the context mode.
It should be used with the C option (described later)
which checks the code on a file basis.
Examples:
To make a report for every semantic patch, run the following command:
Examples
~~~~~~~~
To make a report for every semantic patch, run the following command::
make coccicheck MODE=report
To produce patches, run:
To produce patches, run::
make coccicheck MODE=patch
The coccicheck target applies every semantic patch available in the
sub-directories of 'scripts/coccinelle' to the entire Linux kernel.
sub-directories of ``scripts/coccinelle`` to the entire Linux kernel.
For each semantic patch, a commit message is proposed. It gives a
description of the problem being checked by the semantic patch, and
@ -99,15 +109,15 @@ As any static code analyzer, Coccinelle produces false
positives. Thus, reports must be carefully checked, and patches
reviewed.
To enable verbose messages set the V= variable, for example:
To enable verbose messages set the V= variable, for example::
make coccicheck MODE=report V=1
Coccinelle parallelization
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Coccinelle parallelization
---------------------------
By default, coccicheck tries to run as parallel as possible. To change
the parallelism, set the J= variable. For example, to run across 4 CPUs:
the parallelism, set the J= variable. For example, to run across 4 CPUs::
make coccicheck MODE=report J=4
@ -115,44 +125,47 @@ As of Coccinelle 1.0.2 Coccinelle uses Ocaml parmap for parallelization,
if support for this is detected you will benefit from parmap parallelization.
When parmap is enabled coccicheck will enable dynamic load balancing by using
'--chunksize 1' argument, this ensures we keep feeding threads with work
``--chunksize 1`` argument, this ensures we keep feeding threads with work
one by one, so that we avoid the situation where most work gets done by only
a few threads. With dynamic load balancing, if a thread finishes early we keep
feeding it more work.
When parmap is enabled, if an error occurs in Coccinelle, this error
value is propagated back, the return value of the 'make coccicheck'
value is propagated back, the return value of the ``make coccicheck``
captures this return value.
Using Coccinelle with a single semantic patch
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Using Coccinelle with a single semantic patch
---------------------------------------------
The optional make variable COCCI can be used to check a single
semantic patch. In that case, the variable must be initialized with
the name of the semantic patch to apply.
For instance:
For instance::
make coccicheck COCCI=<my_SP.cocci> MODE=patch
or
or::
make coccicheck COCCI=<my_SP.cocci> MODE=report
Controlling Which Files are Processed by Coccinelle
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Controlling Which Files are Processed by Coccinelle
---------------------------------------------------
By default the entire kernel source tree is checked.
To apply Coccinelle to a specific directory, M= can be used.
For example, to check drivers/net/wireless/ one may write:
To apply Coccinelle to a specific directory, ``M=`` can be used.
For example, to check drivers/net/wireless/ one may write::
make coccicheck M=drivers/net/wireless/
To apply Coccinelle on a file basis, instead of a directory basis, the
following command may be used:
following command may be used::
make C=1 CHECK="scripts/coccicheck"
To check only newly edited code, use the value 2 for the C flag, i.e.
To check only newly edited code, use the value 2 for the C flag, i.e.::
make C=2 CHECK="scripts/coccicheck"
@ -166,8 +179,8 @@ semantic patch as shown in the previous section.
The "report" mode is the default. You can select another one with the
MODE variable explained above.
Debugging Coccinelle SmPL patches
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Debugging Coccinelle SmPL patches
---------------------------------
Using coccicheck is best as it provides in the spatch command line
include options matching the options used when we compile the kernel.
@ -177,8 +190,8 @@ manually run Coccinelle with debug options added.
Alternatively you can debug running Coccinelle against SmPL patches
by asking for stderr to be redirected to stderr, by default stderr
is redirected to /dev/null, if you'd like to capture stderr you
can specify the DEBUG_FILE="file.txt" option to coccicheck. For
instance:
can specify the ``DEBUG_FILE="file.txt"`` option to coccicheck. For
instance::
rm -f cocci.err
make coccicheck COCCI=scripts/coccinelle/free/kfree.cocci MODE=report DEBUG_FILE=cocci.err
@ -186,7 +199,7 @@ instance:
You can use SPFLAGS to add debugging flags, for instance you may want to
add both --profile --show-trying to SPFLAGS when debugging. For instance
you may want to use:
you may want to use::
rm -f err.log
export COCCI=scripts/coccinelle/misc/irqf_oneshot.cocci
@ -198,24 +211,24 @@ work.
DEBUG_FILE support is only supported when using coccinelle >= 1.2.
.cocciconfig support
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.cocciconfig support
--------------------
Coccinelle supports reading .cocciconfig for default Coccinelle options that
should be used every time spatch is spawned, the order of precedence for
variables for .cocciconfig is as follows:
o Your current user's home directory is processed first
o Your directory from which spatch is called is processed next
o The directory provided with the --dir option is processed last, if used
- Your current user's home directory is processed first
- Your directory from which spatch is called is processed next
- The directory provided with the --dir option is processed last, if used
Since coccicheck runs through make, it naturally runs from the kernel
proper dir, as such the second rule above would be implied for picking up a
.cocciconfig when using 'make coccicheck'.
.cocciconfig when using ``make coccicheck``.
'make coccicheck' also supports using M= targets.If you do not supply
``make coccicheck`` also supports using M= targets.If you do not supply
any M= target, it is assumed you want to target the entire kernel.
The kernel coccicheck script has:
The kernel coccicheck script has::
if [ "$KBUILD_EXTMOD" = "" ] ; then
OPTIONS="--dir $srctree $COCCIINCLUDE"
@ -235,12 +248,12 @@ override any of the kernel's .coccicheck's settings using SPFLAGS.
We help Coccinelle when used against Linux with a set of sensible defaults
options for Linux with our own Linux .cocciconfig. This hints to coccinelle
git can be used for 'git grep' queries over coccigrep. A timeout of 200
git can be used for ``git grep`` queries over coccigrep. A timeout of 200
seconds should suffice for now.
The options picked up by coccinelle when reading a .cocciconfig do not appear
as arguments to spatch processes running on your system, to confirm what
options will be used by Coccinelle run:
options will be used by Coccinelle run::
spatch --print-options-only
@ -252,219 +265,227 @@ carries its own .cocciconfig, you will need to use SPFLAGS to use idutils if
desired. See below section "Additional flags" for more details on how to use
idutils.
Additional flags
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Additional flags
----------------
Additional flags can be passed to spatch through the SPFLAGS
variable. This works as Coccinelle respects the last flags
given to it when options are in conflict.
given to it when options are in conflict. ::
make SPFLAGS=--use-glimpse coccicheck
Coccinelle supports idutils as well but requires coccinelle >= 1.0.6.
When no ID file is specified coccinelle assumes your ID database file
is in the file .id-utils.index on the top level of the kernel, coccinelle
carries a script scripts/idutils_index.sh which creates the database with
carries a script scripts/idutils_index.sh which creates the database with::
mkid -i C --output .id-utils.index
If you have another database filename you can also just symlink with this
name.
name. ::
make SPFLAGS=--use-idutils coccicheck
Alternatively you can specify the database filename explicitly, for
instance:
instance::
make SPFLAGS="--use-idutils /full-path/to/ID" coccicheck
See spatch --help to learn more about spatch options.
See ``spatch --help`` to learn more about spatch options.
Note that the '--use-glimpse' and '--use-idutils' options
Note that the ``--use-glimpse`` and ``--use-idutils`` options
require external tools for indexing the code. None of them is
thus active by default. However, by indexing the code with
one of these tools, and according to the cocci file used,
spatch could proceed the entire code base more quickly.
SmPL patch specific options
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SmPL patch specific options
---------------------------
SmPL patches can have their own requirements for options passed
to Coccinelle. SmPL patch specific options can be provided by
providing them at the top of the SmPL patch, for instance:
providing them at the top of the SmPL patch, for instance::
// Options: --no-includes --include-headers
// Options: --no-includes --include-headers
SmPL patch Coccinelle requirements
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SmPL patch Coccinelle requirements
----------------------------------
As Coccinelle features get added some more advanced SmPL patches
may require newer versions of Coccinelle. If an SmPL patch requires
at least a version of Coccinelle, this can be specified as follows,
as an example if requiring at least Coccinelle >= 1.0.5:
as an example if requiring at least Coccinelle >= 1.0.5::
// Requires: 1.0.5
// Requires: 1.0.5
Proposing new semantic patches
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Proposing new semantic patches
-------------------------------
New semantic patches can be proposed and submitted by kernel
developers. For sake of clarity, they should be organized in the
sub-directories of 'scripts/coccinelle/'.
sub-directories of ``scripts/coccinelle/``.
Detailed description of the 'report' mode
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Detailed description of the ``report`` mode
-------------------------------------------
``report`` generates a list in the following format::
'report' generates a list in the following format:
file:line:column-column: message
Example:
Example
~~~~~~~
Running
Running::
make coccicheck MODE=report COCCI=scripts/coccinelle/api/err_cast.cocci
will execute the following part of the SmPL script.
will execute the following part of the SmPL script::
<smpl>
@r depends on !context && !patch && (org || report)@
expression x;
position p;
@@
<smpl>
@r depends on !context && !patch && (org || report)@
expression x;
position p;
@@
ERR_PTR@p(PTR_ERR(x))
ERR_PTR@p(PTR_ERR(x))
@script:python depends on report@
p << r.p;
x << r.x;
@@
@script:python depends on report@
p << r.p;
x << r.x;
@@
msg="ERR_CAST can be used with %s" % (x)
coccilib.report.print_report(p[0], msg)
</smpl>
msg="ERR_CAST can be used with %s" % (x)
coccilib.report.print_report(p[0], msg)
</smpl>
This SmPL excerpt generates entries on the standard output, as
illustrated below:
illustrated below::
/home/user/linux/crypto/ctr.c:188:9-16: ERR_CAST can be used with alg
/home/user/linux/crypto/authenc.c:619:9-16: ERR_CAST can be used with auth
/home/user/linux/crypto/xts.c:227:9-16: ERR_CAST can be used with alg
/home/user/linux/crypto/ctr.c:188:9-16: ERR_CAST can be used with alg
/home/user/linux/crypto/authenc.c:619:9-16: ERR_CAST can be used with auth
/home/user/linux/crypto/xts.c:227:9-16: ERR_CAST can be used with alg
Detailed description of the 'patch' mode
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Detailed description of the ``patch`` mode
------------------------------------------
When the 'patch' mode is available, it proposes a fix for each problem
When the ``patch`` mode is available, it proposes a fix for each problem
identified.
Example:
Example
~~~~~~~
Running::
Running
make coccicheck MODE=patch COCCI=scripts/coccinelle/api/err_cast.cocci
will execute the following part of the SmPL script.
will execute the following part of the SmPL script::
<smpl>
@ depends on !context && patch && !org && !report @
expression x;
@@
<smpl>
@ depends on !context && patch && !org && !report @
expression x;
@@
- ERR_PTR(PTR_ERR(x))
+ ERR_CAST(x)
</smpl>
- ERR_PTR(PTR_ERR(x))
+ ERR_CAST(x)
</smpl>
This SmPL excerpt generates patch hunks on the standard output, as
illustrated below:
illustrated below::
diff -u -p a/crypto/ctr.c b/crypto/ctr.c
--- a/crypto/ctr.c 2010-05-26 10:49:38.000000000 +0200
+++ b/crypto/ctr.c 2010-06-03 23:44:49.000000000 +0200
@@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ static struct crypto_instance *crypto_ct
diff -u -p a/crypto/ctr.c b/crypto/ctr.c
--- a/crypto/ctr.c 2010-05-26 10:49:38.000000000 +0200
+++ b/crypto/ctr.c 2010-06-03 23:44:49.000000000 +0200
@@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ static struct crypto_instance *crypto_ct
alg = crypto_attr_alg(tb[1], CRYPTO_ALG_TYPE_CIPHER,
CRYPTO_ALG_TYPE_MASK);
if (IS_ERR(alg))
- return ERR_PTR(PTR_ERR(alg));
+ return ERR_CAST(alg);
- return ERR_PTR(PTR_ERR(alg));
+ return ERR_CAST(alg);
/* Block size must be >= 4 bytes. */
err = -EINVAL;
Detailed description of the 'context' mode
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Detailed description of the ``context`` mode
--------------------------------------------
'context' highlights lines of interest and their context
``context`` highlights lines of interest and their context
in a diff-like style.
NOTE: The diff-like output generated is NOT an applicable patch. The
intent of the 'context' mode is to highlight the important lines
(annotated with minus, '-') and gives some surrounding context
**NOTE**: The diff-like output generated is NOT an applicable patch. The
intent of the ``context`` mode is to highlight the important lines
(annotated with minus, ``-``) and gives some surrounding context
lines around. This output can be used with the diff mode of
Emacs to review the code.
Example:
Example
~~~~~~~
Running::
Running
make coccicheck MODE=context COCCI=scripts/coccinelle/api/err_cast.cocci
will execute the following part of the SmPL script.
will execute the following part of the SmPL script::
<smpl>
@ depends on context && !patch && !org && !report@
expression x;
@@
<smpl>
@ depends on context && !patch && !org && !report@
expression x;
@@
* ERR_PTR(PTR_ERR(x))
</smpl>
* ERR_PTR(PTR_ERR(x))
</smpl>
This SmPL excerpt generates diff hunks on the standard output, as
illustrated below:
illustrated below::
diff -u -p /home/user/linux/crypto/ctr.c /tmp/nothing
--- /home/user/linux/crypto/ctr.c 2010-05-26 10:49:38.000000000 +0200
+++ /tmp/nothing
@@ -185,7 +185,6 @@ static struct crypto_instance *crypto_ct
diff -u -p /home/user/linux/crypto/ctr.c /tmp/nothing
--- /home/user/linux/crypto/ctr.c 2010-05-26 10:49:38.000000000 +0200
+++ /tmp/nothing
@@ -185,7 +185,6 @@ static struct crypto_instance *crypto_ct
alg = crypto_attr_alg(tb[1], CRYPTO_ALG_TYPE_CIPHER,
CRYPTO_ALG_TYPE_MASK);
if (IS_ERR(alg))
- return ERR_PTR(PTR_ERR(alg));
- return ERR_PTR(PTR_ERR(alg));
/* Block size must be >= 4 bytes. */
err = -EINVAL;
Detailed description of the 'org' mode
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Detailed description of the ``org`` mode
----------------------------------------
'org' generates a report in the Org mode format of Emacs.
``org`` generates a report in the Org mode format of Emacs.
Example:
Example
~~~~~~~
Running::
Running
make coccicheck MODE=org COCCI=scripts/coccinelle/api/err_cast.cocci
will execute the following part of the SmPL script.
will execute the following part of the SmPL script::
<smpl>
@r depends on !context && !patch && (org || report)@
expression x;
position p;
@@
<smpl>
@r depends on !context && !patch && (org || report)@
expression x;
position p;
@@
ERR_PTR@p(PTR_ERR(x))
ERR_PTR@p(PTR_ERR(x))
@script:python depends on org@
p << r.p;
x << r.x;
@@
@script:python depends on org@
p << r.p;
x << r.x;
@@
msg="ERR_CAST can be used with %s" % (x)
msg_safe=msg.replace("[","@(").replace("]",")")
coccilib.org.print_todo(p[0], msg_safe)
</smpl>
msg="ERR_CAST can be used with %s" % (x)
msg_safe=msg.replace("[","@(").replace("]",")")
coccilib.org.print_todo(p[0], msg_safe)
</smpl>
This SmPL excerpt generates Org entries on the standard output, as
illustrated below:
illustrated below::
* TODO [[view:/home/user/linux/crypto/ctr.c::face=ovl-face1::linb=188::colb=9::cole=16][ERR_CAST can be used with alg]]
* TODO [[view:/home/user/linux/crypto/authenc.c::face=ovl-face1::linb=619::colb=9::cole=16][ERR_CAST can be used with auth]]
* TODO [[view:/home/user/linux/crypto/xts.c::face=ovl-face1::linb=227::colb=9::cole=16][ERR_CAST can be used with alg]]
* TODO [[view:/home/user/linux/crypto/ctr.c::face=ovl-face1::linb=188::colb=9::cole=16][ERR_CAST can be used with alg]]
* TODO [[view:/home/user/linux/crypto/authenc.c::face=ovl-face1::linb=619::colb=9::cole=16][ERR_CAST can be used with auth]]
* TODO [[view:/home/user/linux/crypto/xts.c::face=ovl-face1::linb=227::colb=9::cole=16][ERR_CAST can be used with alg]]

256
Documentation/dev-tools/gcov.rst Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,256 @@
Using gcov with the Linux kernel
================================
gcov profiling kernel support enables the use of GCC's coverage testing
tool gcov_ with the Linux kernel. Coverage data of a running kernel
is exported in gcov-compatible format via the "gcov" debugfs directory.
To get coverage data for a specific file, change to the kernel build
directory and use gcov with the ``-o`` option as follows (requires root)::
# cd /tmp/linux-out
# gcov -o /sys/kernel/debug/gcov/tmp/linux-out/kernel spinlock.c
This will create source code files annotated with execution counts
in the current directory. In addition, graphical gcov front-ends such
as lcov_ can be used to automate the process of collecting data
for the entire kernel and provide coverage overviews in HTML format.
Possible uses:
* debugging (has this line been reached at all?)
* test improvement (how do I change my test to cover these lines?)
* minimizing kernel configurations (do I need this option if the
associated code is never run?)
.. _gcov: http://gcc.gnu.org/onlinedocs/gcc/Gcov.html
.. _lcov: http://ltp.sourceforge.net/coverage/lcov.php
Preparation
-----------
Configure the kernel with::
CONFIG_DEBUG_FS=y
CONFIG_GCOV_KERNEL=y
select the gcc's gcov format, default is autodetect based on gcc version::
CONFIG_GCOV_FORMAT_AUTODETECT=y
and to get coverage data for the entire kernel::
CONFIG_GCOV_PROFILE_ALL=y
Note that kernels compiled with profiling flags will be significantly
larger and run slower. Also CONFIG_GCOV_PROFILE_ALL may not be supported
on all architectures.
Profiling data will only become accessible once debugfs has been
mounted::
mount -t debugfs none /sys/kernel/debug
Customization
-------------
To enable profiling for specific files or directories, add a line
similar to the following to the respective kernel Makefile:
- For a single file (e.g. main.o)::
GCOV_PROFILE_main.o := y
- For all files in one directory::
GCOV_PROFILE := y
To exclude files from being profiled even when CONFIG_GCOV_PROFILE_ALL
is specified, use::
GCOV_PROFILE_main.o := n
and::
GCOV_PROFILE := n
Only files which are linked to the main kernel image or are compiled as
kernel modules are supported by this mechanism.
Files
-----
The gcov kernel support creates the following files in debugfs:
``/sys/kernel/debug/gcov``
Parent directory for all gcov-related files.
``/sys/kernel/debug/gcov/reset``
Global reset file: resets all coverage data to zero when
written to.
``/sys/kernel/debug/gcov/path/to/compile/dir/file.gcda``
The actual gcov data file as understood by the gcov
tool. Resets file coverage data to zero when written to.
``/sys/kernel/debug/gcov/path/to/compile/dir/file.gcno``
Symbolic link to a static data file required by the gcov
tool. This file is generated by gcc when compiling with
option ``-ftest-coverage``.
Modules
-------
Kernel modules may contain cleanup code which is only run during
module unload time. The gcov mechanism provides a means to collect
coverage data for such code by keeping a copy of the data associated
with the unloaded module. This data remains available through debugfs.
Once the module is loaded again, the associated coverage counters are
initialized with the data from its previous instantiation.
This behavior can be deactivated by specifying the gcov_persist kernel
parameter::
gcov_persist=0
At run-time, a user can also choose to discard data for an unloaded
module by writing to its data file or the global reset file.
Separated build and test machines
---------------------------------
The gcov kernel profiling infrastructure is designed to work out-of-the
box for setups where kernels are built and run on the same machine. In
cases where the kernel runs on a separate machine, special preparations
must be made, depending on where the gcov tool is used:
a) gcov is run on the TEST machine
The gcov tool version on the test machine must be compatible with the
gcc version used for kernel build. Also the following files need to be
copied from build to test machine:
from the source tree:
- all C source files + headers
from the build tree:
- all C source files + headers
- all .gcda and .gcno files
- all links to directories
It is important to note that these files need to be placed into the
exact same file system location on the test machine as on the build
machine. If any of the path components is symbolic link, the actual
directory needs to be used instead (due to make's CURDIR handling).
b) gcov is run on the BUILD machine
The following files need to be copied after each test case from test
to build machine:
from the gcov directory in sysfs:
- all .gcda files
- all links to .gcno files
These files can be copied to any location on the build machine. gcov
must then be called with the -o option pointing to that directory.
Example directory setup on the build machine::
/tmp/linux: kernel source tree
/tmp/out: kernel build directory as specified by make O=
/tmp/coverage: location of the files copied from the test machine
[user@build] cd /tmp/out
[user@build] gcov -o /tmp/coverage/tmp/out/init main.c
Troubleshooting
---------------
Problem
Compilation aborts during linker step.
Cause
Profiling flags are specified for source files which are not
linked to the main kernel or which are linked by a custom
linker procedure.
Solution
Exclude affected source files from profiling by specifying
``GCOV_PROFILE := n`` or ``GCOV_PROFILE_basename.o := n`` in the
corresponding Makefile.
Problem
Files copied from sysfs appear empty or incomplete.
Cause
Due to the way seq_file works, some tools such as cp or tar
may not correctly copy files from sysfs.
Solution
Use ``cat``' to read ``.gcda`` files and ``cp -d`` to copy links.
Alternatively use the mechanism shown in Appendix B.
Appendix A: gather_on_build.sh
------------------------------
Sample script to gather coverage meta files on the build machine
(see 6a)::
#!/bin/bash
KSRC=$1
KOBJ=$2
DEST=$3
if [ -z "$KSRC" ] || [ -z "$KOBJ" ] || [ -z "$DEST" ]; then
echo "Usage: $0 <ksrc directory> <kobj directory> <output.tar.gz>" >&2
exit 1
fi
KSRC=$(cd $KSRC; printf "all:\n\t@echo \${CURDIR}\n" | make -f -)
KOBJ=$(cd $KOBJ; printf "all:\n\t@echo \${CURDIR}\n" | make -f -)
find $KSRC $KOBJ \( -name '*.gcno' -o -name '*.[ch]' -o -type l \) -a \
-perm /u+r,g+r | tar cfz $DEST -P -T -
if [ $? -eq 0 ] ; then
echo "$DEST successfully created, copy to test system and unpack with:"
echo " tar xfz $DEST -P"
else
echo "Could not create file $DEST"
fi
Appendix B: gather_on_test.sh
-----------------------------
Sample script to gather coverage data files on the test machine
(see 6b)::
#!/bin/bash -e
DEST=$1
GCDA=/sys/kernel/debug/gcov
if [ -z "$DEST" ] ; then
echo "Usage: $0 <output.tar.gz>" >&2
exit 1
fi
TEMPDIR=$(mktemp -d)
echo Collecting data..
find $GCDA -type d -exec mkdir -p $TEMPDIR/\{\} \;
find $GCDA -name '*.gcda' -exec sh -c 'cat < $0 > '$TEMPDIR'/$0' {} \;
find $GCDA -name '*.gcno' -exec sh -c 'cp -d $0 '$TEMPDIR'/$0' {} \;
tar czf $DEST -C $TEMPDIR sys
rm -rf $TEMPDIR
echo "$DEST successfully created, copy to build system and unpack with:"
echo " tar xfz $DEST"

77
Documentation/gdb-kernel-debugging.txt → Documentation/dev-tools/gdb-kernel-debugging.rst
View File

@ -1,3 +1,5 @@
.. highlight:: none
Debugging kernel and modules via gdb
====================================
@ -13,54 +15,58 @@ be transferred to the other gdb stubs as well.
Requirements
------------
o gdb 7.2+ (recommended: 7.4+) with python support enabled (typically true
for distributions)
- gdb 7.2+ (recommended: 7.4+) with python support enabled (typically true
for distributions)
Setup
-----
o Create a virtual Linux machine for QEMU/KVM (see www.linux-kvm.org and
www.qemu.org for more details). For cross-development,
http://landley.net/aboriginal/bin keeps a pool of machine images and
toolchains that can be helpful to start from.
- Create a virtual Linux machine for QEMU/KVM (see www.linux-kvm.org and
www.qemu.org for more details). For cross-development,
http://landley.net/aboriginal/bin keeps a pool of machine images and
toolchains that can be helpful to start from.
o Build the kernel with CONFIG_GDB_SCRIPTS enabled, but leave
CONFIG_DEBUG_INFO_REDUCED off. If your architecture supports
CONFIG_FRAME_POINTER, keep it enabled.
- Build the kernel with CONFIG_GDB_SCRIPTS enabled, but leave
CONFIG_DEBUG_INFO_REDUCED off. If your architecture supports
CONFIG_FRAME_POINTER, keep it enabled.
o Install that kernel on the guest.
- Install that kernel on the guest.
Alternatively, QEMU allows to boot the kernel directly using -kernel,
-append, -initrd command line switches. This is generally only useful if
you do not depend on modules. See QEMU documentation for more details on
this mode.
Alternatively, QEMU allows to boot the kernel directly using -kernel,
-append, -initrd command line switches. This is generally only useful if
you do not depend on modules. See QEMU documentation for more details on
this mode.
- Enable the gdb stub of QEMU/KVM, either
o Enable the gdb stub of QEMU/KVM, either
- at VM startup time by appending "-s" to the QEMU command line
or
or
- during runtime by issuing "gdbserver" from the QEMU monitor
console
o cd /path/to/linux-build
- cd /path/to/linux-build
o Start gdb: gdb vmlinux
- Start gdb: gdb vmlinux
Note: Some distros may restrict auto-loading of gdb scripts to known safe
directories. In case gdb reports to refuse loading vmlinux-gdb.py, add
Note: Some distros may restrict auto-loading of gdb scripts to known safe
directories. In case gdb reports to refuse loading vmlinux-gdb.py, add::
add-auto-load-safe-path /path/to/linux-build
to ~/.gdbinit. See gdb help for more details.
to ~/.gdbinit. See gdb help for more details.
- Attach to the booted guest::
o Attach to the booted guest:
(gdb) target remote :1234
Examples of using the Linux-provided gdb helpers
------------------------------------------------
o Load module (and main kernel) symbols:
- Load module (and main kernel) symbols::
(gdb) lx-symbols
loading vmlinux
scanning for modules in /home/user/linux/build
@ -72,17 +78,20 @@ Examples of using the Linux-provided gdb helpers
...
loading @0xffffffffa0000000: /home/user/linux/build/drivers/ata/ata_generic.ko
o Set a breakpoint on some not yet loaded module function, e.g.:
- Set a breakpoint on some not yet loaded module function, e.g.::
(gdb) b btrfs_init_sysfs
Function "btrfs_init_sysfs" not defined.
Make breakpoint pending on future shared library load? (y or [n]) y
Breakpoint 1 (btrfs_init_sysfs) pending.
o Continue the target
- Continue the target::
(gdb) c
o Load the module on the target and watch the symbols being loaded as well as
the breakpoint hit:
- Load the module on the target and watch the symbols being loaded as well as
the breakpoint hit::
loading @0xffffffffa0034000: /home/user/linux/build/lib/libcrc32c.ko
loading @0xffffffffa0050000: /home/user/linux/build/lib/lzo/lzo_compress.ko
loading @0xffffffffa006e000: /home/user/linux/build/lib/zlib_deflate/zlib_deflate.ko
@ -91,7 +100,8 @@ Examples of using the Linux-provided gdb helpers
Breakpoint 1, btrfs_init_sysfs () at /home/user/linux/fs/btrfs/sysfs.c:36
36 btrfs_kset = kset_create_and_add("btrfs", NULL, fs_kobj);
o Dump the log buffer of the target kernel:
- Dump the log buffer of the target kernel::
(gdb) lx-dmesg
[ 0.000000] Initializing cgroup subsys cpuset
[ 0.000000] Initializing cgroup subsys cpu
@ -102,19 +112,22 @@ Examples of using the Linux-provided gdb helpers
[ 0.000000] BIOS-e820: [mem 0x000000000009fc00-0x000000000009ffff] reserved
....
o Examine fields of the current task struct:
- Examine fields of the current task struct::
(gdb) p $lx_current().pid
$1 = 4998
(gdb) p $lx_current().comm
$2 = "modprobe\000\000\000\000\000\000\000"
o Make use of the per-cpu function for the current or a specified CPU:
- Make use of the per-cpu function for the current or a specified CPU::
(gdb) p $lx_per_cpu("runqueues").nr_running
$3 = 1
(gdb) p $lx_per_cpu("runqueues", 2).nr_running
$4 = 0
o Dig into hrtimers using the container_of helper:
- Dig into hrtimers using the container_of helper::
(gdb) set $next = $lx_per_cpu("hrtimer_bases").clock_base[0].active.next
(gdb) p *$container_of($next, "struct hrtimer", "node")
$5 = {
@ -144,7 +157,7 @@ List of commands and functions
------------------------------
The number of commands and convenience functions may evolve over the time,
this is just a snapshot of the initial version:
this is just a snapshot of the initial version::
(gdb) apropos lx
function lx_current -- Return current task

173
Documentation/dev-tools/kasan.rst Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,173 @@
The Kernel Address Sanitizer (KASAN)
====================================
Overview
--------
KernelAddressSANitizer (KASAN) is a dynamic memory error detector. It provides
a fast and comprehensive solution for finding use-after-free and out-of-bounds
bugs.
KASAN uses compile-time instrumentation for checking every memory access,
therefore you will need a GCC version 4.9.2 or later. GCC 5.0 or later is
required for detection of out-of-bounds accesses to stack or global variables.
Currently KASAN is supported only for the x86_64 and arm64 architectures.
Usage
-----
To enable KASAN configure kernel with::
CONFIG_KASAN = y
and choose between CONFIG_KASAN_OUTLINE and CONFIG_KASAN_INLINE. Outline and
inline are compiler instrumentation types. The former produces smaller binary
the latter is 1.1 - 2 times faster. Inline instrumentation requires a GCC
version 5.0 or later.
KASAN works with both SLUB and SLAB memory allocators.
For better bug detection and nicer reporting, enable CONFIG_STACKTRACE.
To disable instrumentation for specific files or directories, add a line
similar to the following to the respective kernel Makefile:
- For a single file (e.g. main.o)::
KASAN_SANITIZE_main.o := n
- For all files in one directory::
KASAN_SANITIZE := n
Error reports
~~~~~~~~~~~~~
A typical out of bounds access report looks like this::
==================================================================
BUG: AddressSanitizer: out of bounds access in kmalloc_oob_right+0x65/0x75 [test_kasan] at addr ffff8800693bc5d3
Write of size 1 by task modprobe/1689
=============================================================================
BUG kmalloc-128 (Not tainted): kasan error
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Disabling lock debugging due to kernel taint
INFO: Allocated in kmalloc_oob_right+0x3d/0x75 [test_kasan] age=0 cpu=0 pid=1689
__slab_alloc+0x4b4/0x4f0
kmem_cache_alloc_trace+0x10b/0x190
kmalloc_oob_right+0x3d/0x75 [test_kasan]
init_module+0x9/0x47 [test_kasan]
do_one_initcall+0x99/0x200
load_module+0x2cb3/0x3b20
SyS_finit_module+0x76/0x80
system_call_fastpath+0x12/0x17
INFO: Slab 0xffffea0001a4ef00 objects=17 used=7 fp=0xffff8800693bd728 flags=0x100000000004080
INFO: Object 0xffff8800693bc558 @offset=1368 fp=0xffff8800693bc720
Bytes b4 ffff8800693bc548: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 5a 5a 5a 5a 5a 5a 5a 5a ........ZZZZZZZZ
Object ffff8800693bc558: 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
Object ffff8800693bc568: 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
Object ffff8800693bc578: 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
Object ffff8800693bc588: 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
Object ffff8800693bc598: 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
Object ffff8800693bc5a8: 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
Object ffff8800693bc5b8: 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
Object ffff8800693bc5c8: 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b 6b a5 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkk.
Redzone ffff8800693bc5d8: cc cc cc cc cc cc cc cc ........
Padding ffff8800693bc718: 5a 5a 5a 5a 5a 5a 5a 5a ZZZZZZZZ
CPU: 0 PID: 1689 Comm: modprobe Tainted: G B 3.18.0-rc1-mm1+ #98
Hardware name: QEMU Standard PC (i440FX + PIIX, 1996), BIOS rel-1.7.5-0-ge51488c-20140602_164612-nilsson.home.kraxel.org 04/01/2014
ffff8800693bc000 0000000000000000 ffff8800693bc558 ffff88006923bb78
ffffffff81cc68ae 00000000000000f3 ffff88006d407600 ffff88006923bba8
ffffffff811fd848 ffff88006d407600 ffffea0001a4ef00 ffff8800693bc558
Call Trace:
[<ffffffff81cc68ae>] dump_stack+0x46/0x58
[<ffffffff811fd848>] print_trailer+0xf8/0x160
[<ffffffffa00026a7>] ? kmem_cache_oob+0xc3/0xc3 [test_kasan]
[<ffffffff811ff0f5>] object_err+0x35/0x40
[<ffffffffa0002065>] ? kmalloc_oob_right+0x65/0x75 [test_kasan]
[<ffffffff8120b9fa>] kasan_report_error+0x38a/0x3f0
[<ffffffff8120a79f>] ? kasan_poison_shadow+0x2f/0x40
[<ffffffff8120b344>] ? kasan_unpoison_shadow+0x14/0x40
[<ffffffff8120a79f>] ? kasan_poison_shadow+0x2f/0x40
[<ffffffffa00026a7>] ? kmem_cache_oob+0xc3/0xc3 [test_kasan]
[<ffffffff8120a995>] __asan_store1+0x75/0xb0
[<ffffffffa0002601>] ? kmem_cache_oob+0x1d/0xc3 [test_kasan]
[<ffffffffa0002065>] ? kmalloc_oob_right+0x65/0x75 [test_kasan]
[<ffffffffa0002065>] kmalloc_oob_right+0x65/0x75 [test_kasan]
[<ffffffffa00026b0>] init_module+0x9/0x47 [test_kasan]
[<ffffffff810002d9>] do_one_initcall+0x99/0x200
[<ffffffff811e4e5c>] ? __vunmap+0xec/0x160
[<ffffffff81114f63>] load_module+0x2cb3/0x3b20
[<ffffffff8110fd70>] ? m_show+0x240/0x240
[<ffffffff81115f06>] SyS_finit_module+0x76/0x80
[<ffffffff81cd3129>] system_call_fastpath+0x12/0x17
Memory state around the buggy address:
ffff8800693bc300: fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc
ffff8800693bc380: fc fc 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 fc
ffff8800693bc400: fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc
ffff8800693bc480: fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc
ffff8800693bc500: fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc 00 00 00 00 00
>ffff8800693bc580: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 03 fc fc fc fc fc
^
ffff8800693bc600: fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc
ffff8800693bc680: fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc fc
ffff8800693bc700: fc fc fc fc fb fb fb fb fb fb fb fb fb fb fb fb
ffff8800693bc780: fb fb fb fb fb fb fb fb fb fb fb fb fb fb fb fb
ffff8800693bc800: fb fb fb fb fb fb fb fb fb fb fb fb fb fb fb fb
==================================================================
The header of the report discribe what kind of bug happened and what kind of
access caused it. It's followed by the description of the accessed slub object
(see 'SLUB Debug output' section in Documentation/vm/slub.txt for details) and
the description of the accessed memory page.
In the last section the report shows memory state around the accessed address.
Reading this part requires some understanding of how KASAN works.
The state of each 8 aligned bytes of memory is encoded in one shadow byte.
Those 8 bytes can be accessible, partially accessible, freed or be a redzone.
We use the following encoding for each shadow byte: 0 means that all 8 bytes
of the corresponding memory region are accessible; number N (1 <= N <= 7) means
that the first N bytes are accessible, and other (8 - N) bytes are not;
any negative value indicates that the entire 8-byte word is inaccessible.
We use different negative values to distinguish between different kinds of
inaccessible memory like redzones or freed memory (see mm/kasan/kasan.h).
In the report above the arrows point to the shadow byte 03, which means that
the accessed address is partially accessible.
Implementation details
----------------------
From a high level, our approach to memory error detection is similar to that
of kmemcheck: use shadow memory to record whether each byte of memory is safe
to access, and use compile-time instrumentation to check shadow memory on each
memory access.
AddressSanitizer dedicates 1/8 of kernel memory to its shadow memory
(e.g. 16TB to cover 128TB on x86_64) and uses direct mapping with a scale and
offset to translate a memory address to its corresponding shadow address.
Here is the function which translates an address to its corresponding shadow
address::
static inline void *kasan_mem_to_shadow(const void *addr)
{
return ((unsigned long)addr >> KASAN_SHADOW_SCALE_SHIFT)
+ KASAN_SHADOW_OFFSET;
}
where ``KASAN_SHADOW_SCALE_SHIFT = 3``.
Compile-time instrumentation used for checking memory accesses. Compiler inserts
function calls (__asan_load*(addr), __asan_store*(addr)) before each memory
access of size 1, 2, 4, 8 or 16. These functions check whether memory access is
valid or not by checking corresponding shadow memory.
GCC 5.0 has possibility to perform inline instrumentation. Instead of making
function calls GCC directly inserts the code to check the shadow memory.
This option significantly enlarges kernel but it gives x1.1-x2 performance
boost over outline instrumented kernel.

74
Documentation/kcov.txt → Documentation/dev-tools/kcov.rst
View File

@ -12,38 +12,38 @@ To achieve this goal it does not collect coverage in soft/hard interrupts
and instrumentation of some inherently non-deterministic parts of kernel is
disbled (e.g. scheduler, locking).
Usage:
======
Usage
-----
Configure kernel with:
Configure the kernel with::
CONFIG_KCOV=y
CONFIG_KCOV requires gcc built on revision 231296 or later.
Profiling data will only become accessible once debugfs has been mounted:
Profiling data will only become accessible once debugfs has been mounted::
mount -t debugfs none /sys/kernel/debug
The following program demonstrates kcov usage from within a test program:
The following program demonstrates kcov usage from within a test program::
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stddef.h>
#include <stdint.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <sys/stat.h>
#include <sys/ioctl.h>
#include <sys/mman.h>
#include <unistd.h>
#include <fcntl.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stddef.h>
#include <stdint.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <sys/stat.h>
#include <sys/ioctl.h>
#include <sys/mman.h>
#include <unistd.h>
#include <fcntl.h>
#define KCOV_INIT_TRACE _IOR('c', 1, unsigned long)
#define KCOV_ENABLE _IO('c', 100)
#define KCOV_DISABLE _IO('c', 101)
#define COVER_SIZE (64<<10)
#define KCOV_INIT_TRACE _IOR('c', 1, unsigned long)
#define KCOV_ENABLE _IO('c', 100)
#define KCOV_DISABLE _IO('c', 101)
#define COVER_SIZE (64<<10)
int main(int argc, char **argv)
{
int main(int argc, char **argv)
{
int fd;
unsigned long *cover, n, i;
@ -83,24 +83,24 @@ int main(int argc, char **argv)
if (close(fd))
perror("close"), exit(1);
return 0;
}
}
After piping through addr2line output of the program looks as follows:
After piping through addr2line output of the program looks as follows::
SyS_read
fs/read_write.c:562
__fdget_pos
fs/file.c:774
__fget_light
fs/file.c:746
__fget_light
fs/file.c:750
__fget_light
fs/file.c:760
__fdget_pos
fs/file.c:784
SyS_read
fs/read_write.c:562
SyS_read
fs/read_write.c:562
__fdget_pos
fs/file.c:774
__fget_light
fs/file.c:746
__fget_light
fs/file.c:750
__fget_light
fs/file.c:760
__fdget_pos
fs/file.c:784
SyS_read
fs/read_write.c:562
If a program needs to collect coverage from several threads (independently),
it needs to open /sys/kernel/debug/kcov in each thread separately.

733
Documentation/dev-tools/kmemcheck.rst Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,733 @@
Getting started with kmemcheck
==============================
Vegard Nossum <vegardno@ifi.uio.no>
Introduction
------------
kmemcheck is a debugging feature for the Linux Kernel. More specifically, it
is a dynamic checker that detects and warns about some uses of uninitialized
memory.
Userspace programmers might be familiar with Valgrind's memcheck. The main
difference between memcheck and kmemcheck is that memcheck works for userspace
programs only, and kmemcheck works for the kernel only. The implementations
are of course vastly different. Because of this, kmemcheck is not as accurate
as memcheck, but it turns out to be good enough in practice to discover real
programmer errors that the compiler is not able to find through static
analysis.
Enabling kmemcheck on a kernel will probably slow it down to the extent that
the machine will not be usable for normal workloads such as e.g. an
interactive desktop. kmemcheck will also cause the kernel to use about twice
as much memory as normal. For this reason, kmemcheck is strictly a debugging
feature.
Downloading
-----------
As of version 2.6.31-rc1, kmemcheck is included in the mainline kernel.
Configuring and compiling
-------------------------
kmemcheck only works for the x86 (both 32- and 64-bit) platform. A number of
configuration variables must have specific settings in order for the kmemcheck
menu to even appear in "menuconfig". These are:
- ``CONFIG_CC_OPTIMIZE_FOR_SIZE=n``
This option is located under "General setup" / "Optimize for size".
Without this, gcc will use certain optimizations that usually lead to
false positive warnings from kmemcheck. An example of this is a 16-bit
field in a struct, where gcc may load 32 bits, then discard the upper
16 bits. kmemcheck sees only the 32-bit load, and may trigger a
warning for the upper 16 bits (if they're uninitialized).
- ``CONFIG_SLAB=y`` or ``CONFIG_SLUB=y``
This option is located under "General setup" / "Choose SLAB
allocator".
- ``CONFIG_FUNCTION_TRACER=n``
This option is located under "Kernel hacking" / "Tracers" / "Kernel
Function Tracer"
When function tracing is compiled in, gcc emits a call to another
function at the beginning of every function. This means that when the
page fault handler is called, the ftrace framework will be called
before kmemcheck has had a chance to handle the fault. If ftrace then
modifies memory that was tracked by kmemcheck, the result is an
endless recursive page fault.
- ``CONFIG_DEBUG_PAGEALLOC=n``
This option is located under "Kernel hacking" / "Memory Debugging"
/ "Debug page memory allocations".
In addition, I highly recommend turning on ``CONFIG_DEBUG_INFO=y``. This is also
located under "Kernel hacking". With this, you will be able to get line number
information from the kmemcheck warnings, which is extremely valuable in
debugging a problem. This option is not mandatory, however, because it slows
down the compilation process and produces a much bigger kernel image.
Now the kmemcheck menu should be visible (under "Kernel hacking" / "Memory
Debugging" / "kmemcheck: trap use of uninitialized memory"). Here follows
a description of the kmemcheck configuration variables:
- ``CONFIG_KMEMCHECK``
This must be enabled in order to use kmemcheck at all...
- ``CONFIG_KMEMCHECK_``[``DISABLED`` | ``ENABLED`` | ``ONESHOT``]``_BY_DEFAULT``
This option controls the status of kmemcheck at boot-time. "Enabled"
will enable kmemcheck right from the start, "disabled" will boot the
kernel as normal (but with the kmemcheck code compiled in, so it can
be enabled at run-time after the kernel has booted), and "one-shot" is
a special mode which will turn kmemcheck off automatically after
detecting the first use of uninitialized memory.
If you are using kmemcheck to actively debug a problem, then you
probably want to choose "enabled" here.
The one-shot mode is mostly useful in automated test setups because it
can prevent floods of warnings and increase the chances of the machine
surviving in case something is really wrong. In other cases, the one-
shot mode could actually be counter-productive because it would turn
itself off at the very first error -- in the case of a false positive
too -- and this would come in the way of debugging the specific
problem you were interested in.
If you would like to use your kernel as normal, but with a chance to
enable kmemcheck in case of some problem, it might be a good idea to
choose "disabled" here. When kmemcheck is disabled, most of the run-
time overhead is not incurred, and the kernel will be almost as fast
as normal.
- ``CONFIG_KMEMCHECK_QUEUE_SIZE``
Select the maximum number of error reports to store in an internal
(fixed-size) buffer. Since errors can occur virtually anywhere and in
any context, we need a temporary storage area which is guaranteed not
to generate any other page faults when accessed. The queue will be
emptied as soon as a tasklet may be scheduled. If the queue is full,
new error reports will be lost.
The default value of 64 is probably fine. If some code produces more
than 64 errors within an irqs-off section, then the code is likely to
produce many, many more, too, and these additional reports seldom give
any more information (the first report is usually the most valuable
anyway).
This number might have to be adjusted if you are not using serial
console or similar to capture the kernel log. If you are using the
"dmesg" command to save the log, then getting a lot of kmemcheck
warnings might overflow the kernel log itself, and the earlier reports
will get lost in that way instead. Try setting this to 10 or so on
such a setup.
- ``CONFIG_KMEMCHECK_SHADOW_COPY_SHIFT``
Select the number of shadow bytes to save along with each entry of the
error-report queue. These bytes indicate what parts of an allocation
are initialized, uninitialized, etc. and will be displayed when an
error is detected to help the debugging of a particular problem.
The number entered here is actually the logarithm of the number of
bytes that will be saved. So if you pick for example 5 here, kmemcheck
will save 2^5 = 32 bytes.
The default value should be fine for debugging most problems. It also
fits nicely within 80 columns.
- ``CONFIG_KMEMCHECK_PARTIAL_OK``
This option (when enabled) works around certain GCC optimizations that
produce 32-bit reads from 16-bit variables where the upper 16 bits are
thrown away afterwards.
The default value (enabled) is recommended. This may of course hide
some real errors, but disabling it would probably produce a lot of
false positives.
- ``CONFIG_KMEMCHECK_BITOPS_OK``
This option silences warnings that would be generated for bit-field
accesses where not all the bits are initialized at the same time. This
may also hide some real bugs.
This option is probably obsolete, or it should be replaced with
the kmemcheck-/bitfield-annotations for the code in question. The
default value is therefore fine.
Now compile the kernel as usual.
How to use
----------
Booting
~~~~~~~
First some information about the command-line options. There is only one
option specific to kmemcheck, and this is called "kmemcheck". It can be used
to override the default mode as chosen by the ``CONFIG_KMEMCHECK_*_BY_DEFAULT``
option. Its possible settings are:
- ``kmemcheck=0`` (disabled)
- ``kmemcheck=1`` (enabled)
- ``kmemcheck=2`` (one-shot mode)
If SLUB debugging has been enabled in the kernel, it may take precedence over
kmemcheck in such a way that the slab caches which are under SLUB debugging
will not be tracked by kmemcheck. In order to ensure that this doesn't happen
(even though it shouldn't by default), use SLUB's boot option ``slub_debug``,
like this: ``slub_debug=-``
In fact, this option may also be used for fine-grained control over SLUB vs.
kmemcheck. For example, if the command line includes
``kmemcheck=1 slub_debug=,dentry``, then SLUB debugging will be used only
for the "dentry" slab cache, and with kmemcheck tracking all the other
caches. This is advanced usage, however, and is not generally recommended.
Run-time enable/disable
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
When the kernel has booted, it is possible to enable or disable kmemcheck at
run-time. WARNING: This feature is still experimental and may cause false
positive warnings to appear. Therefore, try not to use this. If you find that
it doesn't work properly (e.g. you see an unreasonable amount of warnings), I
will be happy to take bug reports.
Use the file ``/proc/sys/kernel/kmemcheck`` for this purpose, e.g.::
$ echo 0 > /proc/sys/kernel/kmemcheck # disables kmemcheck
The numbers are the same as for the ``kmemcheck=`` command-line option.
Debugging
~~~~~~~~~
A typical report will look something like this::
WARNING: kmemcheck: Caught 32-bit read from uninitialized memory (ffff88003e4a2024)
80000000000000000000000000000000000000000088ffff0000000000000000
i i i i u u u u i i i i i i i i u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u
^
Pid: 1856, comm: ntpdate Not tainted 2.6.29-rc5 #264 945P-A
RIP: 0010:[<ffffffff8104ede8>] [<ffffffff8104ede8>] __dequeue_signal+0xc8/0x190
RSP: 0018:ffff88003cdf7d98 EFLAGS: 00210002
RAX: 0000000000000030 RBX: ffff88003d4ea968 RCX: 0000000000000009
RDX: ffff88003e5d6018 RSI: ffff88003e5d6024 RDI: ffff88003cdf7e84
RBP: ffff88003cdf7db8 R08: ffff88003e5d6000 R09: 0000000000000000
R10: 0000000000000080 R11: 0000000000000000 R12: 000000000000000e
R13: ffff88003cdf7e78 R14: ffff88003d530710 R15: ffff88003d5a98c8
FS: 0000000000000000(0000) GS:ffff880001982000(0063) knlGS:00000
CS: 0010 DS: 002b ES: 002b CR0: 0000000080050033
CR2: ffff88003f806ea0 CR3: 000000003c036000 CR4: 00000000000006a0
DR0: 0000000000000000 DR1: 0000000000000000 DR2: 0000000000000000
DR3: 0000000000000000 DR6: 00000000ffff4ff0 DR7: 0000000000000400
[<ffffffff8104f04e>] dequeue_signal+0x8e/0x170
[<ffffffff81050bd8>] get_signal_to_deliver+0x98/0x390
[<ffffffff8100b87d>] do_notify_resume+0xad/0x7d0
[<ffffffff8100c7b5>] int_signal+0x12/0x17
[<ffffffffffffffff>] 0xffffffffffffffff
The single most valuable information in this report is the RIP (or EIP on 32-
bit) value. This will help us pinpoint exactly which instruction that caused
the warning.
If your kernel was compiled with ``CONFIG_DEBUG_INFO=y``, then all we have to do
is give this address to the addr2line program, like this::
$ addr2line -e vmlinux -i ffffffff8104ede8
arch/x86/include/asm/string_64.h:12
include/asm-generic/siginfo.h:287
kernel/signal.c:380
kernel/signal.c:410
The "``-e vmlinux``" tells addr2line which file to look in. **IMPORTANT:**
This must be the vmlinux of the kernel that produced the warning in the
first place! If not, the line number information will almost certainly be
wrong.
The "``-i``" tells addr2line to also print the line numbers of inlined
functions. In this case, the flag was very important, because otherwise,
it would only have printed the first line, which is just a call to
``memcpy()``, which could be called from a thousand places in the kernel, and
is therefore not very useful. These inlined functions would not show up in
the stack trace above, simply because the kernel doesn't load the extra
debugging information. This technique can of course be used with ordinary
kernel oopses as well.
In this case, it's the caller of ``memcpy()`` that is interesting, and it can be
found in ``include/asm-generic/siginfo.h``, line 287::
281 static inline void copy_siginfo(struct siginfo *to, struct siginfo *from)
282 {
283 if (from->si_code < 0)
284 memcpy(to, from, sizeof(*to));
285 else
286 /* _sigchld is currently the largest know union member */
287 memcpy(to, from, __ARCH_SI_PREAMBLE_SIZE + sizeof(from->_sifields._sigchld));
288 }
Since this was a read (kmemcheck usually warns about reads only, though it can
warn about writes to unallocated or freed memory as well), it was probably the
"from" argument which contained some uninitialized bytes. Following the chain
of calls, we move upwards to see where "from" was allocated or initialized,
``kernel/signal.c``, line 380::
359 static void collect_signal(int sig, struct sigpending *list, siginfo_t *info)
360 {
...
367 list_for_each_entry(q, &list->list, list) {
368 if (q->info.si_signo == sig) {
369 if (first)
370 goto still_pending;
371 first = q;
...
377 if (first) {
378 still_pending:
379 list_del_init(&first->list);
380 copy_siginfo(info, &first->info);
381 __sigqueue_free(first);
...
392 }
393 }
Here, it is ``&first->info`` that is being passed on to ``copy_siginfo()``. The
variable ``first`` was found on a list -- passed in as the second argument to
``collect_signal()``. We continue our journey through the stack, to figure out
where the item on "list" was allocated or initialized. We move to line 410::
395 static int __dequeue_signal(struct sigpending *pending, sigset_t *mask,
396 siginfo_t *info)
397 {
...
410 collect_signal(sig, pending, info);
...
414 }
Now we need to follow the ``pending`` pointer, since that is being passed on to
``collect_signal()`` as ``list``. At this point, we've run out of lines from the
"addr2line" output. Not to worry, we just paste the next addresses from the
kmemcheck stack dump, i.e.::
[<ffffffff8104f04e>] dequeue_signal+0x8e/0x170
[<ffffffff81050bd8>] get_signal_to_deliver+0x98/0x390
[<ffffffff8100b87d>] do_notify_resume+0xad/0x7d0
[<ffffffff8100c7b5>] int_signal+0x12/0x17
$ addr2line -e vmlinux -i ffffffff8104f04e ffffffff81050bd8 \
ffffffff8100b87d ffffffff8100c7b5
kernel/signal.c:446
kernel/signal.c:1806
arch/x86/kernel/signal.c:805
arch/x86/kernel/signal.c:871
arch/x86/kernel/entry_64.S:694
Remember that since these addresses were found on the stack and not as the
RIP value, they actually point to the _next_ instruction (they are return
addresses). This becomes obvious when we look at the code for line 446::
422 int dequeue_signal(struct task_struct *tsk, sigset_t *mask, siginfo_t *info)
423 {
...
431 signr = __dequeue_signal(&tsk->signal->shared_pending,
432 mask, info);
433 /*
434 * itimer signal ?
435 *
436 * itimers are process shared and we restart periodic
437 * itimers in the signal delivery path to prevent DoS
438 * attacks in the high resolution timer case. This is
439 * compliant with the old way of self restarting
440 * itimers, as the SIGALRM is a legacy signal and only
441 * queued once. Changing the restart behaviour to
442 * restart the timer in the signal dequeue path is
443 * reducing the timer noise on heavy loaded !highres
444 * systems too.
445 */
446 if (unlikely(signr == SIGALRM)) {
...
489 }
So instead of looking at 446, we should be looking at 431, which is the line
that executes just before 446. Here we see that what we are looking for is
``&tsk->signal->shared_pending``.
Our next task is now to figure out which function that puts items on this
``shared_pending`` list. A crude, but efficient tool, is ``git grep``::
$ git grep -n 'shared_pending' kernel/
...
kernel/signal.c:828: pending = group ? &t->signal->shared_pending : &t->pending;
kernel/signal.c:1339: pending = group ? &t->signal->shared_pending : &t->pending;
...
There were more results, but none of them were related to list operations,
and these were the only assignments. We inspect the line numbers more closely
and find that this is indeed where items are being added to the list::
816 static int send_signal(int sig, struct siginfo *info, struct task_struct *t,
817 int group)
818 {
...
828 pending = group ? &t->signal->shared_pending : &t->pending;
...
851 q = __sigqueue_alloc(t, GFP_ATOMIC, (sig < SIGRTMIN &&
852 (is_si_special(info) ||
853 info->si_code >= 0)));
854 if (q) {
855 list_add_tail(&q->list, &pending->list);
...
890 }
and::
1309 int send_sigqueue(struct sigqueue *q, struct task_struct *t, int group)
1310 {
....
1339 pending = group ? &t->signal->shared_pending : &t->pending;
1340 list_add_tail(&q->list, &pending->list);
....
1347 }
In the first case, the list element we are looking for, ``q``, is being
returned from the function ``__sigqueue_alloc()``, which looks like an
allocation function. Let's take a look at it::
187 static struct sigqueue *__sigqueue_alloc(struct task_struct *t, gfp_t flags,
188 int override_rlimit)
189 {
190 struct sigqueue *q = NULL;
191 struct user_struct *user;
192
193 /*
194 * We won't get problems with the target's UID changing under us
195 * because changing it requires RCU be used, and if t != current, the
196 * caller must be holding the RCU readlock (by way of a spinlock) and
197 * we use RCU protection here
198 */
199 user = get_uid(__task_cred(t)->user);
200 atomic_inc(&user->sigpending);
201 if (override_rlimit ||
202 atomic_read(&user->sigpending) <=
203 t->signal->rlim[RLIMIT_SIGPENDING].rlim_cur)
204 q = kmem_cache_alloc(sigqueue_cachep, flags);
205 if (unlikely(q == NULL)) {
206 atomic_dec(&user->sigpending);
207 free_uid(user);
208 } else {
209 INIT_LIST_HEAD(&q->list);
210 q->flags = 0;
211 q->user = user;
212 }
213
214 return q;
215 }
We see that this function initializes ``q->list``, ``q->flags``, and
``q->user``. It seems that now is the time to look at the definition of
``struct sigqueue``, e.g.::
14 struct sigqueue {
15 struct list_head list;
16 int flags;
17 siginfo_t info;
18 struct user_struct *user;
19 };
And, you might remember, it was a ``memcpy()`` on ``&first->info`` that
caused the warning, so this makes perfect sense. It also seems reasonable
to assume that it is the caller of ``__sigqueue_alloc()`` that has the
responsibility of filling out (initializing) this member.
But just which fields of the struct were uninitialized? Let's look at
kmemcheck's report again::
WARNING: kmemcheck: Caught 32-bit read from uninitialized memory (ffff88003e4a2024)
80000000000000000000000000000000000000000088ffff0000000000000000
i i i i u u u u i i i i i i i i u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u
^
These first two lines are the memory dump of the memory object itself, and
the shadow bytemap, respectively. The memory object itself is in this case
``&first->info``. Just beware that the start of this dump is NOT the start
of the object itself! The position of the caret (^) corresponds with the
address of the read (ffff88003e4a2024).
The shadow bytemap dump legend is as follows:
- i: initialized
- u: uninitialized
- a: unallocated (memory has been allocated by the slab layer, but has not
yet been handed off to anybody)
- f: freed (memory has been allocated by the slab layer, but has been freed
by the previous owner)
In order to figure out where (relative to the start of the object) the
uninitialized memory was located, we have to look at the disassembly. For
that, we'll need the RIP address again::
RIP: 0010:[<ffffffff8104ede8>] [<ffffffff8104ede8>] __dequeue_signal+0xc8/0x190
$ objdump -d --no-show-raw-insn vmlinux | grep -C 8 ffffffff8104ede8:
ffffffff8104edc8: mov %r8,0x8(%r8)
ffffffff8104edcc: test %r10d,%r10d
ffffffff8104edcf: js ffffffff8104ee88 <__dequeue_signal+0x168>
ffffffff8104edd5: mov %rax,%rdx
ffffffff8104edd8: mov $0xc,%ecx
ffffffff8104eddd: mov %r13,%rdi
ffffffff8104ede0: mov $0x30,%eax
ffffffff8104ede5: mov %rdx,%rsi
ffffffff8104ede8: rep movsl %ds:(%rsi),%es:(%rdi)
ffffffff8104edea: test $0x2,%al
ffffffff8104edec: je ffffffff8104edf0 <__dequeue_signal+0xd0>
ffffffff8104edee: movsw %ds:(%rsi),%es:(%rdi)
ffffffff8104edf0: test $0x1,%al
ffffffff8104edf2: je ffffffff8104edf5 <__dequeue_signal+0xd5>
ffffffff8104edf4: movsb %ds:(%rsi),%es:(%rdi)
ffffffff8104edf5: mov %r8,%rdi
ffffffff8104edf8: callq ffffffff8104de60 <__sigqueue_free>
As expected, it's the "``rep movsl``" instruction from the ``memcpy()``
that causes the warning. We know about ``REP MOVSL`` that it uses the register
``RCX`` to count the number of remaining iterations. By taking a look at the
register dump again (from the kmemcheck report), we can figure out how many
bytes were left to copy::
RAX: 0000000000000030 RBX: ffff88003d4ea968 RCX: 0000000000000009
By looking at the disassembly, we also see that ``%ecx`` is being loaded
with the value ``$0xc`` just before (ffffffff8104edd8), so we are very
lucky. Keep in mind that this is the number of iterations, not bytes. And
since this is a "long" operation, we need to multiply by 4 to get the
number of bytes. So this means that the uninitialized value was encountered
at 4 * (0xc - 0x9) = 12 bytes from the start of the object.
We can now try to figure out which field of the "``struct siginfo``" that
was not initialized. This is the beginning of the struct::
40 typedef struct siginfo {
41 int si_signo;
42 int si_errno;
43 int si_code;
44
45 union {
..
92 } _sifields;
93 } siginfo_t;
On 64-bit, the int is 4 bytes long, so it must the union member that has
not been initialized. We can verify this using gdb::
$ gdb vmlinux
...
(gdb) p &((struct siginfo *) 0)->_sifields
$1 = (union {...} *) 0x10
Actually, it seems that the union member is located at offset 0x10 -- which
means that gcc has inserted 4 bytes of padding between the members ``si_code``
and ``_sifields``. We can now get a fuller picture of the memory dump::
_----------------------------=> si_code
/ _--------------------=> (padding)
| / _------------=> _sifields(._kill._pid)
| | / _----=> _sifields(._kill._uid)
| | | /
-------|-------|-------|-------|
80000000000000000000000000000000000000000088ffff0000000000000000
i i i i u u u u i i i i i i i i u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u u
This allows us to realize another important fact: ``si_code`` contains the
value 0x80. Remember that x86 is little endian, so the first 4 bytes
"80000000" are really the number 0x00000080. With a bit of research, we
find that this is actually the constant ``SI_KERNEL`` defined in
``include/asm-generic/siginfo.h``::
144 #define SI_KERNEL 0x80 /* sent by the kernel from somewhere */
This macro is used in exactly one place in the x86 kernel: In ``send_signal()``
in ``kernel/signal.c``::
816 static int send_signal(int sig, struct siginfo *info, struct task_struct *t,
817 int group)
818 {
...
828 pending = group ? &t->signal->shared_pending : &t->pending;
...
851 q = __sigqueue_alloc(t, GFP_ATOMIC, (sig < SIGRTMIN &&
852 (is_si_special(info) ||
853 info->si_code >= 0)));
854 if (q) {
855 list_add_tail(&q->list, &pending->list);
856 switch ((unsigned long) info) {
...
865 case (unsigned long) SEND_SIG_PRIV:
866 q->info.si_signo = sig;
867 q->info.si_errno = 0;
868 q->info.si_code = SI_KERNEL;
869 q->info.si_pid = 0;
870 q->info.si_uid = 0;
871 break;
...
890 }
Not only does this match with the ``.si_code`` member, it also matches the place
we found earlier when looking for where siginfo_t objects are enqueued on the
``shared_pending`` list.
So to sum up: It seems that it is the padding introduced by the compiler
between two struct fields that is uninitialized, and this gets reported when
we do a ``memcpy()`` on the struct. This means that we have identified a false
positive warning.
Normally, kmemcheck will not report uninitialized accesses in ``memcpy()`` calls
when both the source and destination addresses are tracked. (Instead, we copy
the shadow bytemap as well). In this case, the destination address clearly
was not tracked. We can dig a little deeper into the stack trace from above::
arch/x86/kernel/signal.c:805
arch/x86/kernel/signal.c:871
arch/x86/kernel/entry_64.S:694
And we clearly see that the destination siginfo object is located on the
stack::
782 static void do_signal(struct pt_regs *regs)
783 {
784 struct k_sigaction ka;
785 siginfo_t info;
...
804 signr = get_signal_to_deliver(&info, &ka, regs, NULL);
...
854 }
And this ``&info`` is what eventually gets passed to ``copy_siginfo()`` as the
destination argument.
Now, even though we didn't find an actual error here, the example is still a
good one, because it shows how one would go about to find out what the report
was all about.
Annotating false positives
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
There are a few different ways to make annotations in the source code that
will keep kmemcheck from checking and reporting certain allocations. Here
they are:
- ``__GFP_NOTRACK_FALSE_POSITIVE``
This flag can be passed to ``kmalloc()`` or ``kmem_cache_alloc()``
(therefore also to other functions that end up calling one of
these) to indicate that the allocation should not be tracked
because it would lead to a false positive report. This is a "big
hammer" way of silencing kmemcheck; after all, even if the false
positive pertains to particular field in a struct, for example, we
will now lose the ability to find (real) errors in other parts of
the same struct.
Example::
/* No warnings will ever trigger on accessing any part of x */
x = kmalloc(sizeof *x, GFP_KERNEL | __GFP_NOTRACK_FALSE_POSITIVE);
- ``kmemcheck_bitfield_begin(name)``/``kmemcheck_bitfield_end(name)`` and
``kmemcheck_annotate_bitfield(ptr, name)``
The first two of these three macros can be used inside struct
definitions to signal, respectively, the beginning and end of a
bitfield. Additionally, this will assign the bitfield a name, which
is given as an argument to the macros.
Having used these markers, one can later use
kmemcheck_annotate_bitfield() at the point of allocation, to indicate
which parts of the allocation is part of a bitfield.
Example::
struct foo {
int x;
kmemcheck_bitfield_begin(flags);
int flag_a:1;
int flag_b:1;
kmemcheck_bitfield_end(flags);
int y;
};
struct foo *x = kmalloc(sizeof *x);
/* No warnings will trigger on accessing the bitfield of x */
kmemcheck_annotate_bitfield(x, flags);
Note that ``kmemcheck_annotate_bitfield()`` can be used even before the
return value of ``kmalloc()`` is checked -- in other words, passing NULL
as the first argument is legal (and will do nothing).
Reporting errors
----------------
As we have seen, kmemcheck will produce false positive reports. Therefore, it
is not very wise to blindly post kmemcheck warnings to mailing lists and
maintainers. Instead, I encourage maintainers and developers to find errors
in their own code. If you get a warning, you can try to work around it, try
to figure out if it's a real error or not, or simply ignore it. Most
developers know their own code and will quickly and efficiently determine the
root cause of a kmemcheck report. This is therefore also the most efficient
way to work with kmemcheck.
That said, we (the kmemcheck maintainers) will always be on the lookout for
false positives that we can annotate and silence. So whatever you find,
please drop us a note privately! Kernel configs and steps to reproduce (if
available) are of course a great help too.
Happy hacking!
Technical description
---------------------
kmemcheck works by marking memory pages non-present. This means that whenever
somebody attempts to access the page, a page fault is generated. The page
fault handler notices that the page was in fact only hidden, and so it calls
on the kmemcheck code to make further investigations.
When the investigations are completed, kmemcheck "shows" the page by marking
it present (as it would be under normal circumstances). This way, the
interrupted code can continue as usual.
But after the instruction has been executed, we should hide the page again, so
that we can catch the next access too! Now kmemcheck makes use of a debugging
feature of the processor, namely single-stepping. When the processor has
finished the one instruction that generated the memory access, a debug
exception is raised. From here, we simply hide the page again and continue
execution, this time with the single-stepping feature turned off.
kmemcheck requires some assistance from the memory allocator in order to work.
The memory allocator needs to
1. Tell kmemcheck about newly allocated pages and pages that are about to
be freed. This allows kmemcheck to set up and tear down the shadow memory
for the pages in question. The shadow memory stores the status of each
byte in the allocation proper, e.g. whether it is initialized or
uninitialized.
2. Tell kmemcheck which parts of memory should be marked uninitialized.
There are actually a few more states, such as "not yet allocated" and
"recently freed".
If a slab cache is set up using the SLAB_NOTRACK flag, it will never return
memory that can take page faults because of kmemcheck.
If a slab cache is NOT set up using the SLAB_NOTRACK flag, callers can still
request memory with the __GFP_NOTRACK or __GFP_NOTRACK_FALSE_POSITIVE flags.
This does not prevent the page faults from occurring, however, but marks the
object in question as being initialized so that no warnings will ever be
produced for this object.
Currently, the SLAB and SLUB allocators are supported by kmemcheck.

98
Documentation/kmemleak.txt → Documentation/dev-tools/kmemleak.rst
View File

@ -1,15 +1,12 @@
Kernel Memory Leak Detector
===========================
Introduction
------------
Kmemleak provides a way of detecting possible kernel memory leaks in a
way similar to a tracing garbage collector
(https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Garbage_collection_%28computer_science%29#Tracing_garbage_collectors),
with the difference that the orphan objects are not freed but only
reported via /sys/kernel/debug/kmemleak. A similar method is used by the
Valgrind tool (memcheck --leak-check) to detect the memory leaks in
Valgrind tool (``memcheck --leak-check``) to detect the memory leaks in
user-space applications.
Kmemleak is supported on x86, arm, powerpc, sparc, sh, microblaze, ppc, mips, s390, metag and tile.
@ -19,20 +16,20 @@ Usage
CONFIG_DEBUG_KMEMLEAK in "Kernel hacking" has to be enabled. A kernel
thread scans the memory every 10 minutes (by default) and prints the
number of new unreferenced objects found. To display the details of all
the possible memory leaks:
the possible memory leaks::
# mount -t debugfs nodev /sys/kernel/debug/
# cat /sys/kernel/debug/kmemleak
To trigger an intermediate memory scan:
To trigger an intermediate memory scan::
# echo scan > /sys/kernel/debug/kmemleak
To clear the list of all current possible memory leaks:
To clear the list of all current possible memory leaks::
# echo clear > /sys/kernel/debug/kmemleak
New leaks will then come up upon reading /sys/kernel/debug/kmemleak
New leaks will then come up upon reading ``/sys/kernel/debug/kmemleak``
again.
Note that the orphan objects are listed in the order they were allocated
@ -40,22 +37,31 @@ and one object at the beginning of the list may cause other subsequent
objects to be reported as orphan.
Memory scanning parameters can be modified at run-time by writing to the
/sys/kernel/debug/kmemleak file. The following parameters are supported:
``/sys/kernel/debug/kmemleak`` file. The following parameters are supported:
off - disable kmemleak (irreversible)
stack=on - enable the task stacks scanning (default)
stack=off - disable the tasks stacks scanning
scan=on - start the automatic memory scanning thread (default)
scan=off - stop the automatic memory scanning thread
scan=<secs> - set the automatic memory scanning period in seconds
(default 600, 0 to stop the automatic scanning)
scan - trigger a memory scan
clear - clear list of current memory leak suspects, done by
marking all current reported unreferenced objects grey,
or free all kmemleak objects if kmemleak has been disabled.
dump=<addr> - dump information about the object found at <addr>
- off
disable kmemleak (irreversible)
- stack=on
enable the task stacks scanning (default)
- stack=off
disable the tasks stacks scanning
- scan=on
start the automatic memory scanning thread (default)
- scan=off
stop the automatic memory scanning thread
- scan=<secs>
set the automatic memory scanning period in seconds
(default 600, 0 to stop the automatic scanning)
- scan
trigger a memory scan
- clear
clear list of current memory leak suspects, done by
marking all current reported unreferenced objects grey,
or free all kmemleak objects if kmemleak has been disabled.
- dump=<addr>
dump information about the object found at <addr>
Kmemleak can also be disabled at boot-time by passing "kmemleak=off" on
Kmemleak can also be disabled at boot-time by passing ``kmemleak=off`` on
the kernel command line.
Memory may be allocated or freed before kmemleak is initialised and
@ -63,13 +69,14 @@ these actions are stored in an early log buffer. The size of this buffer
is configured via the CONFIG_DEBUG_KMEMLEAK_EARLY_LOG_SIZE option.
If CONFIG_DEBUG_KMEMLEAK_DEFAULT_OFF are enabled, the kmemleak is
disabled by default. Passing "kmemleak=on" on the kernel command
disabled by default. Passing ``kmemleak=on`` on the kernel command
line enables the function.
Basic Algorithm
---------------
The memory allocations via kmalloc, vmalloc, kmem_cache_alloc and
The memory allocations via :c:func:`kmalloc`, :c:func:`vmalloc`,
:c:func:`kmem_cache_alloc` and
friends are traced and the pointers, together with additional
information like size and stack trace, are stored in a rbtree.
The corresponding freeing function calls are tracked and the pointers
@ -113,13 +120,13 @@ when doing development. To work around these situations you can use the
you can find new unreferenced objects; this should help with testing
specific sections of code.
To test a critical section on demand with a clean kmemleak do:
To test a critical section on demand with a clean kmemleak do::
# echo clear > /sys/kernel/debug/kmemleak
... test your kernel or modules ...
# echo scan > /sys/kernel/debug/kmemleak
Then as usual to get your report with:
Then as usual to get your report with::
# cat /sys/kernel/debug/kmemleak
@ -131,7 +138,7 @@ disabled by the user or due to an fatal error, internal kmemleak objects
won't be freed when kmemleak is disabled, and those objects may occupy
a large part of physical memory.
In this situation, you may reclaim memory with:
In this situation, you may reclaim memory with::
# echo clear > /sys/kernel/debug/kmemleak
@ -140,20 +147,29 @@ Kmemleak API
See the include/linux/kmemleak.h header for the functions prototype.
kmemleak_init - initialize kmemleak
kmemleak_alloc - notify of a memory block allocation
kmemleak_alloc_percpu - notify of a percpu memory block allocation
kmemleak_free - notify of a memory block freeing
kmemleak_free_part - notify of a partial memory block freeing
kmemleak_free_percpu - notify of a percpu memory block freeing
kmemleak_update_trace - update object allocation stack trace
kmemleak_not_leak - mark an object as not a leak
kmemleak_ignore - do not scan or report an object as leak
kmemleak_scan_area - add scan areas inside a memory block
kmemleak_no_scan - do not scan a memory block
kmemleak_erase - erase an old value in a pointer variable
kmemleak_alloc_recursive - as kmemleak_alloc but checks the recursiveness
kmemleak_free_recursive - as kmemleak_free but checks the recursiveness
- ``kmemleak_init`` - initialize kmemleak
- ``kmemleak_alloc`` - notify of a memory block allocation
- ``kmemleak_alloc_percpu`` - notify of a percpu memory block allocation
- ``kmemleak_free`` - notify of a memory block freeing
- ``kmemleak_free_part`` - notify of a partial memory block freeing
- ``kmemleak_free_percpu`` - notify of a percpu memory block freeing
- ``kmemleak_update_trace`` - update object allocation stack trace
- ``kmemleak_not_leak`` - mark an object as not a leak
- ``kmemleak_ignore`` - do not scan or report an object as leak
- ``kmemleak_scan_area`` - add scan areas inside a memory block
- ``kmemleak_no_scan`` - do not scan a memory block
- ``kmemleak_erase`` - erase an old value in a pointer variable
- ``kmemleak_alloc_recursive`` - as kmemleak_alloc but checks the recursiveness
- ``kmemleak_free_recursive`` - as kmemleak_free but checks the recursiveness
The following functions take a physical address as the object pointer
and only perform the corresponding action if the address has a lowmem
mapping:
- ``kmemleak_alloc_phys``
- ``kmemleak_free_part_phys``
- ``kmemleak_not_leak_phys``
- ``kmemleak_ignore_phys``
Dealing with false positives/negatives
--------------------------------------

39
Documentation/sparse.txt → Documentation/dev-tools/sparse.rst
View File

@ -1,11 +1,20 @@
Copyright 2004 Linus Torvalds
Copyright 2004 Pavel Machek <pavel@ucw.cz>
Copyright 2006 Bob Copeland <me@bobcopeland.com>
.. Copyright 2004 Linus Torvalds
.. Copyright 2004 Pavel Machek <pavel@ucw.cz>
.. Copyright 2006 Bob Copeland <me@bobcopeland.com>
Sparse
======
Sparse is a semantic checker for C programs; it can be used to find a
number of potential problems with kernel code. See
https://lwn.net/Articles/689907/ for an overview of sparse; this document
contains some kernel-specific sparse information.
Using sparse for typechecking
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-----------------------------
"__bitwise" is a type attribute, so you have to do something like this:
"__bitwise" is a type attribute, so you have to do something like this::
typedef int __bitwise pm_request_t;
@ -20,13 +29,13 @@ but in this case we really _do_ want to force the conversion). And because
the enum values are all the same type, now "enum pm_request" will be that
type too.
And with gcc, all the __bitwise/__force stuff goes away, and it all ends
up looking just like integers to gcc.
And with gcc, all the "__bitwise"/"__force stuff" goes away, and it all
ends up looking just like integers to gcc.
Quite frankly, you don't need the enum there. The above all really just
boils down to one special "int __bitwise" type.
So the simpler way is to just do
So the simpler way is to just do::
typedef int __bitwise pm_request_t;
@ -50,7 +59,7 @@ __bitwise - noisy stuff; in particular, __le*/__be* are that. We really
don't want to drown in noise unless we'd explicitly asked for it.
Using sparse for lock checking
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
------------------------------
The following macros are undefined for gcc and defined during a sparse
run to use the "context" tracking feature of sparse, applied to
@ -69,22 +78,22 @@ annotation is needed. The tree annotations above are for cases where
sparse would otherwise report a context imbalance.
Getting sparse
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
--------------
You can get latest released versions from the Sparse homepage at
https://sparse.wiki.kernel.org/index.php/Main_Page
Alternatively, you can get snapshots of the latest development version
of sparse using git to clone..
of sparse using git to clone::
git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/devel/sparse/sparse.git
DaveJ has hourly generated tarballs of the git tree available at..
DaveJ has hourly generated tarballs of the git tree available at::
http://www.codemonkey.org.uk/projects/git-snapshots/sparse/
Once you have it, just do
Once you have it, just do::
make
make install
@ -92,7 +101,7 @@ Once you have it, just do
as a regular user, and it will install sparse in your ~/bin directory.
Using sparse
~~~~~~~~~~~~
------------
Do a kernel make with "make C=1" to run sparse on all the C files that get
recompiled, or use "make C=2" to run sparse on the files whether they need to
@ -101,7 +110,7 @@ have already built it.
The optional make variable CF can be used to pass arguments to sparse. The
build system passes -Wbitwise to sparse automatically. To perform endianness
checks, you may define __CHECK_ENDIAN__:
checks, you may define __CHECK_ENDIAN__::
make C=2 CF="-D__CHECK_ENDIAN__"

25
Documentation/dev-tools/tools.rst Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
================================
Development tools for the kernel
================================
This document is a collection of documents about development tools that can
be used to work on the kernel. For now, the documents have been pulled
together without any significant effot to integrate them into a coherent
whole; patches welcome!
.. class:: toc-title
Table of contents
.. toctree::
:maxdepth: 2
coccinelle
sparse
kcov
gcov
kasan
ubsan
kmemleak
kmemcheck
gdb-kernel-debugging

42
Documentation/ubsan.txt → Documentation/dev-tools/ubsan.rst
View File

@ -1,7 +1,5 @@
Undefined Behavior Sanitizer - UBSAN
Overview
--------
The Undefined Behavior Sanitizer - UBSAN
========================================
UBSAN is a runtime undefined behaviour checker.
@ -10,11 +8,13 @@ Compiler inserts code that perform certain kinds of checks before operations
that may cause UB. If check fails (i.e. UB detected) __ubsan_handle_*
function called to print error message.
GCC has that feature since 4.9.x [1] (see -fsanitize=undefined option and
its suboptions). GCC 5.x has more checkers implemented [2].
GCC has that feature since 4.9.x [1_] (see ``-fsanitize=undefined`` option and
its suboptions). GCC 5.x has more checkers implemented [2_].
Report example
---------------
--------------
::
================================================================================
UBSAN: Undefined behaviour in ../include/linux/bitops.h:110:33
@ -47,29 +47,33 @@ Report example
Usage
-----
To enable UBSAN configure kernel with:
To enable UBSAN configure kernel with::
CONFIG_UBSAN=y
and to check the entire kernel:
and to check the entire kernel::
CONFIG_UBSAN_SANITIZE_ALL=y
To enable instrumentation for specific files or directories, add a line
similar to the following to the respective kernel Makefile:
For a single file (e.g. main.o):
UBSAN_SANITIZE_main.o := y
- For a single file (e.g. main.o)::
For all files in one directory:
UBSAN_SANITIZE := y
UBSAN_SANITIZE_main.o := y
- For all files in one directory::
UBSAN_SANITIZE := y
To exclude files from being instrumented even if
CONFIG_UBSAN_SANITIZE_ALL=y, use:
``CONFIG_UBSAN_SANITIZE_ALL=y``, use::
UBSAN_SANITIZE_main.o := n
and:
UBSAN_SANITIZE := n
UBSAN_SANITIZE_main.o := n
and::
UBSAN_SANITIZE := n
Detection of unaligned accesses controlled through the separate option -
CONFIG_UBSAN_ALIGNMENT. It's off by default on architectures that support
@ -80,5 +84,5 @@ reports.
References
----------
[1] - https://gcc.gnu.org/onlinedocs/gcc-4.9.0/gcc/Debugging-Options.html
[2] - https://gcc.gnu.org/onlinedocs/gcc/Debugging-Options.html
.. _1: https://gcc.gnu.org/onlinedocs/gcc-4.9.0/gcc/Debugging-Options.html
.. _2: https://gcc.gnu.org/onlinedocs/gcc/Debugging-Options.html

68
Documentation/development-process/1.Intro → Documentation/development-process/1.Intro.rst
View File

@ -1,16 +1,8 @@
1: A GUIDE TO THE KERNEL DEVELOPMENT PROCESS
Introdution
===========
The purpose of this document is to help developers (and their managers)
work with the development community with a minimum of frustration. It is
an attempt to document how this community works in a way which is
accessible to those who are not intimately familiar with Linux kernel
development (or, indeed, free software development in general). While
there is some technical material here, this is very much a process-oriented
discussion which does not require a deep knowledge of kernel programming to
understand.
1.1: EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
Executive summary
-----------------
The rest of this section covers the scope of the kernel development process
and the kinds of frustrations that developers and their employers can
@ -20,41 +12,41 @@ availability to users, community support in many forms, and the ability to
influence the direction of kernel development. Code contributed to the
Linux kernel must be made available under a GPL-compatible license.
Section 2 introduces the development process, the kernel release cycle, and
the mechanics of the merge window. The various phases in the patch
development, review, and merging cycle are covered. There is some
:ref:`development_process` introduces the development process, the kernel
release cycle, and the mechanics of the merge window. The various phases in
the patch development, review, and merging cycle are covered. There is some
discussion of tools and mailing lists. Developers wanting to get started
with kernel development are encouraged to track down and fix bugs as an
initial exercise.
Section 3 covers early-stage project planning, with an emphasis on
involving the development community as soon as possible.
:ref:`development_early_stage` covers early-stage project planning, with an
emphasis on involving the development community as soon as possible.
Section 4 is about the coding process; several pitfalls which have been
encountered by other developers are discussed. Some requirements for
:ref:`development_coding` is about the coding process; several pitfalls which
have been encountered by other developers are discussed. Some requirements for
patches are covered, and there is an introduction to some of the tools
which can help to ensure that kernel patches are correct.
Section 5 talks about the process of posting patches for review. To be
taken seriously by the development community, patches must be properly
formatted and described, and they must be sent to the right place.
:ref:`development_posting` talks about the process of posting patches for
review. To be taken seriously by the development community, patches must be
properly formatted and described, and they must be sent to the right place.
Following the advice in this section should help to ensure the best
possible reception for your work.
Section 6 covers what happens after posting patches; the job is far from
done at that point. Working with reviewers is a crucial part of the
development process; this section offers a number of tips on how to avoid
problems at this important stage. Developers are cautioned against
:ref:`development_followthrough` covers what happens after posting patches; the
job is far from done at that point. Working with reviewers is a crucial part
of the development process; this section offers a number of tips on how to
avoid problems at this important stage. Developers are cautioned against
assuming that the job is done when a patch is merged into the mainline.
Section 7 introduces a couple of "advanced" topics: managing patches with
git and reviewing patches posted by others.
:ref:`development_advancedtopics` introduces a couple of "advanced" topics:
managing patches with git and reviewing patches posted by others.
Section 8 concludes the document with pointers to sources for more
information on kernel development.
:ref:`development_conclusion` concludes the document with pointers to sources
for more information on kernel development.
1.2: WHAT THIS DOCUMENT IS ABOUT
What this document is about
---------------------------
The Linux kernel, at over 8 million lines of code and well over 1000
contributors to each release, is one of the largest and most active free
@ -108,8 +100,8 @@ community is always in need of developers who will help to make the kernel
better; the following text should help you - or those who work for you -
join our community.
1.3: CREDITS
Credits
-------
This document was written by Jonathan Corbet, corbet@lwn.net. It has been
improved by comments from Johannes Berg, James Berry, Alex Chiang, Roland
@ -120,8 +112,8 @@ Jochen Voß.
This work was supported by the Linux Foundation; thanks especially to
Amanda McPherson, who saw the value of this effort and made it all happen.
1.4: THE IMPORTANCE OF GETTING CODE INTO THE MAINLINE
The importance of getting code into the mainline
------------------------------------------------
Some companies and developers occasionally wonder why they should bother
learning how to work with the kernel community and get their code into the
@ -233,8 +225,8 @@ commercial life, after which a new version must be released. At that
point, vendors whose code is in the mainline and well maintained will be
much better positioned to get the new product ready for market quickly.
1.5: LICENSING
Licensing
---------
Code is contributed to the Linux kernel under a number of licenses, but all
code must be compatible with version 2 of the GNU General Public License

41
Documentation/development-process/2.Process → Documentation/development-process/2.Process.rst
View File

@ -1,4 +1,7 @@
2: HOW THE DEVELOPMENT PROCESS WORKS
.. _development_process:
How the development process works
=================================
Linux kernel development in the early 1990's was a pretty loose affair,
with relatively small numbers of users and developers involved. With a
@ -7,19 +10,21 @@ course of one year, the kernel has since had to evolve a number of
processes to keep development happening smoothly. A solid understanding of
how the process works is required in order to be an effective part of it.
2.1: THE BIG PICTURE
The big picture
---------------
The kernel developers use a loosely time-based release process, with a new
major kernel release happening every two or three months. The recent
release history looks like this:
====== =================
2.6.38 March 14, 2011
2.6.37 January 4, 2011
2.6.36 October 20, 2010
2.6.35 August 1, 2010
2.6.34 May 15, 2010
2.6.33 February 24, 2010
====== =================
Every 2.6.x release is a major kernel release with new features, internal
API changes, and more. A typical 2.6 release can contain nearly 10,000
@ -68,6 +73,7 @@ At that point the whole process starts over again.
As an example, here is how the 2.6.38 development cycle went (all dates in
2011):
============== ===============================
January 4 2.6.37 stable release
January 18 2.6.38-rc1, merge window closes
January 21 2.6.38-rc2
@ -78,6 +84,7 @@ As an example, here is how the 2.6.38 development cycle went (all dates in
March 1 2.6.38-rc7
March 7 2.6.38-rc8
March 14 2.6.38 stable release
============== ===============================
How do the developers decide when to close the development cycle and create
the stable release? The most significant metric used is the list of
@ -105,11 +112,13 @@ next development kernel. Kernels will typically receive stable updates for
a little more than one development cycle past their initial release. So,
for example, the 2.6.36 kernel's history looked like:
============== ===============================
October 10 2.6.36 stable release
November 22 2.6.36.1
December 9 2.6.36.2
January 7 2.6.36.3
February 17 2.6.36.4
============== ===============================
2.6.36.4 was the final stable update for the 2.6.36 release.
@ -117,9 +126,11 @@ Some kernels are designated "long term" kernels; they will receive support
for a longer period. As of this writing, the current long term kernels
and their maintainers are:
====== ====================== ===========================
2.6.27 Willy Tarreau (Deep-frozen stable kernel)
2.6.32 Greg Kroah-Hartman
2.6.35 Andi Kleen (Embedded flag kernel)
====== ====================== ===========================
The selection of a kernel for long-term support is purely a matter of a
maintainer having the need and the time to maintain that release. There
@ -127,7 +138,8 @@ are no known plans for long-term support for any specific upcoming
release.
2.2: THE LIFECYCLE OF A PATCH
The lifecycle of a patch
------------------------
Patches do not go directly from the developer's keyboard into the mainline
kernel. There is, instead, a somewhat involved (if somewhat informal)
@ -195,8 +207,8 @@ is to try to cut the process down to a single "merging into the mainline"
step. This approach invariably leads to frustration for everybody
involved.
2.3: HOW PATCHES GET INTO THE KERNEL
How patches get into the Kernel
-------------------------------
There is exactly one person who can merge patches into the mainline kernel
repository: Linus Torvalds. But, of the over 9,500 patches which went
@ -242,7 +254,8 @@ finding the right maintainer. Sending patches directly to Linus is not
normally the right way to go.
2.4: NEXT TREES
Next trees
----------
The chain of subsystem trees guides the flow of patches into the kernel,
but it also raises an interesting question: what if somebody wants to look
@ -294,7 +307,8 @@ all patches merged during a given merge window should really have found
their way into linux-next some time before the merge window opens.
2.4.1: STAGING TREES
Staging trees
-------------
The kernel source tree contains the drivers/staging/ directory, where
many sub-directories for drivers or filesystems that are on their way to
@ -322,7 +336,8 @@ staging drivers. So staging is, at best, a stop on the way toward becoming
a proper mainline driver.
2.5: TOOLS
Tools
-----
As can be seen from the above text, the kernel development process depends
heavily on the ability to herd collections of patches in various
@ -368,7 +383,8 @@ upstream. For the management of certain kinds of trees (-mm, for example),
quilt is the best tool for the job.
2.6: MAILING LISTS
Mailing lists
-------------
A great deal of Linux kernel development work is done by way of mailing
lists. It is hard to be a fully-functioning member of the community
@ -436,7 +452,8 @@ filesystem, etc. subsystems. The best place to look for mailing lists is
in the MAINTAINERS file packaged with the kernel source.
2.7: GETTING STARTED WITH KERNEL DEVELOPMENT
Getting started with Kernel development
---------------------------------------
Questions about how to get started with the kernel development process are
common - from both individuals and companies. Equally common are missteps
@ -463,6 +480,8 @@ they wish for by these means.
Andrew Morton gives this advice for aspiring kernel developers
::
The #1 project for all kernel beginners should surely be "make sure
that the kernel runs perfectly at all times on all machines which
you can lay your hands on". Usually the way to do this is to work

22
Documentation/development-process/3.Early-stage → Documentation/development-process/3.Early-stage.rst
View File

@ -1,4 +1,7 @@
3: EARLY-STAGE PLANNING
.. _development_early_stage:
Early-stage planning
====================
When contemplating a Linux kernel development project, it can be tempting
to jump right in and start coding. As with any significant project,
@ -7,7 +10,8 @@ line of code is written. Some time spent in early planning and
communication can save far more time later on.
3.1: SPECIFYING THE PROBLEM
Specifying the problem
----------------------
Like any engineering project, a successful kernel enhancement starts with a
clear description of the problem to be solved. In some cases, this step is
@ -64,7 +68,8 @@ answers to a short set of questions:
Only then does it make sense to start considering possible solutions.
3.2: EARLY DISCUSSION
Early discussion
----------------
When planning a kernel development project, it makes great sense to hold
discussions with the community before launching into implementation. Early
@ -117,7 +122,8 @@ In each of these cases, a great deal of pain and extra work could have been
avoided with some early discussion with the kernel developers.
3.3: WHO DO YOU TALK TO?
Who do you talk to?
-------------------
When developers decide to take their plans public, the next question will
be: where do we start? The answer is to find the right mailing list(s) and
@ -141,6 +147,8 @@ development project.
The task of finding the right maintainer is sometimes challenging enough
that the kernel developers have added a script to ease the process:
::
.../scripts/get_maintainer.pl
This script will return the current maintainer(s) for a given file or
@ -155,7 +163,8 @@ If all else fails, talking to Andrew Morton can be an effective way to
track down a maintainer for a specific piece of code.
3.4: WHEN TO POST?
When to post?
-------------
If possible, posting your plans during the early stages can only be
helpful. Describe the problem being solved and any plans that have been
@ -179,7 +188,8 @@ idea. The best thing to do in this situation is to proceed, keeping the
community informed as you go.
3.5: GETTING OFFICIAL BUY-IN
Getting official buy-in
-----------------------
If your work is being done in a corporate environment - as most Linux
kernel work is - you must, obviously, have permission from suitably

46
Documentation/development-process/4.Coding → Documentation/development-process/4.Coding.rst
View File

@ -1,4 +1,7 @@
4: GETTING THE CODE RIGHT
.. _development_coding:
Getting the code right
======================
While there is much to be said for a solid and community-oriented design
process, the proof of any kernel development project is in the resulting
@ -12,9 +15,11 @@ will shift toward doing things right and the tools which can help in that
quest.
4.1: PITFALLS
Pitfalls
---------
* Coding style
Coding style
************
The kernel has long had a standard coding style, described in
Documentation/CodingStyle. For much of that time, the policies described
@ -54,7 +59,8 @@ style (a line which becomes far less readable if split to fit within the
80-column limit, for example), just do it.
* Abstraction layers
Abstraction layers
******************
Computer Science professors teach students to make extensive use of
abstraction layers in the name of flexibility and information hiding.
@ -87,7 +93,8 @@ implement that functionality at a higher level. There is no value in
replicating the same code throughout the kernel.
* #ifdef and preprocessor use in general
#ifdef and preprocessor use in general
**************************************
The C preprocessor seems to present a powerful temptation to some C
programmers, who see it as a way to efficiently encode a great deal of
@ -113,7 +120,8 @@ easier to read, do not evaluate their arguments multiple times, and allow
the compiler to perform type checking on the arguments and return value.
* Inline functions
Inline functions
****************
Inline functions present a hazard of their own, though. Programmers can
become enamored of the perceived efficiency inherent in avoiding a function
@ -137,7 +145,8 @@ placement of "inline" keywords may not just be excessive; it could also be
irrelevant.
* Locking
Locking
*******
In May, 2006, the "Devicescape" networking stack was, with great
fanfare, released under the GPL and made available for inclusion in the
@ -151,7 +160,7 @@ This code showed a number of signs of having been developed behind
corporate doors. But one large problem in particular was that it was not
designed to work on multiprocessor systems. Before this networking stack
(now called mac80211) could be merged, a locking scheme needed to be
retrofitted onto it.
retrofitted onto it.
Once upon a time, Linux kernel code could be developed without thinking
about the concurrency issues presented by multiprocessor systems. Now,
@ -169,7 +178,8 @@ enough to pick the right tool for the job. Code which shows a lack of
attention to concurrency will have a difficult path into the mainline.
* Regressions
Regressions
***********
One final hazard worth mentioning is this: it can be tempting to make a
change (which may bring big improvements) which causes something to break
@ -185,6 +195,8 @@ change if it brings new functionality to ten systems for each one it
breaks? The best answer to this question was expressed by Linus in July,
2007:
::
So we don't fix bugs by introducing new problems. That way lies
madness, and nobody ever knows if you actually make any real
progress at all. Is it two steps forwards, one step back, or one
@ -201,8 +213,8 @@ reason, a great deal of thought, clear documentation, and wide review for
user-space interfaces is always required.
4.2: CODE CHECKING TOOLS
Code checking tools
-------------------
For now, at least, the writing of error-free code remains an ideal that few
of us can reach. What we can hope to do, though, is to catch and fix as
@ -250,7 +262,7 @@ testing purposes. In particular, you should turn on:
There are quite a few other debugging options, some of which will be
discussed below. Some of them have a significant performance impact and
should not be used all of the time. But some time spent learning the
available options will likely be paid back many times over in short order.
available options will likely be paid back many times over in short order.
One of the heavier debugging tools is the locking checker, or "lockdep."
This tool will track the acquisition and release of every lock (spinlock or
@ -263,7 +275,7 @@ occasion, deadlock. This kind of problem can be painful (for both
developers and users) in a deployed system; lockdep allows them to be found
in an automated manner ahead of time. Code with any sort of non-trivial
locking should be run with lockdep enabled before being submitted for
inclusion.
inclusion.
As a diligent kernel programmer, you will, beyond doubt, check the return
status of any operation (such as a memory allocation) which can fail. The
@ -300,7 +312,7 @@ Documentation/coccinelle.txt for more information.
Other kinds of portability errors are best found by compiling your code for
other architectures. If you do not happen to have an S/390 system or a
Blackfin development board handy, you can still perform the compilation
step. A large set of cross compilers for x86 systems can be found at
step. A large set of cross compilers for x86 systems can be found at
http://www.kernel.org/pub/tools/crosstool/
@ -308,7 +320,8 @@ Some time spent installing and using these compilers will help avoid
embarrassment later.
4.3: DOCUMENTATION
Documentation
-------------
Documentation has often been more the exception than the rule with kernel
development. Even so, adequate documentation will help to ease the merging
@ -364,7 +377,8 @@ out. Anything which might tempt a code janitor to make an incorrect
"cleanup" needs a comment saying why it is done the way it is. And so on.
4.4: INTERNAL API CHANGES
Internal API changes
--------------------
The binary interface provided by the kernel to user space cannot be broken
except under the most severe circumstances. The kernel's internal

26
Documentation/development-process/5.Posting → Documentation/development-process/5.Posting.rst
View File

@ -1,4 +1,7 @@
5: POSTING PATCHES
.. _development_posting:
Posting patches
===============
Sooner or later, the time comes when your work is ready to be presented to
the community for review and, eventually, inclusion into the mainline
@ -11,7 +14,8 @@ SubmittingDrivers, and SubmitChecklist in the kernel documentation
directory.
5.1: WHEN TO POST
When to post
------------
There is a constant temptation to avoid posting patches before they are
completely "ready." For simple patches, that is not a problem. If the
@ -27,7 +31,8 @@ patches which are known to be half-baked, but those who do will come in
with the idea that they can help you drive the work in the right direction.
5.2: BEFORE CREATING PATCHES
Before creating patches
-----------------------
There are a number of things which should be done before you consider
sending patches to the development community. These include:
@ -52,7 +57,8 @@ As a general rule, putting in some extra thought before posting code almost
always pays back the effort in short order.
5.3: PATCH PREPARATION
Patch preparation
-----------------
The preparation of patches for posting can be a surprising amount of work,
but, once again, attempting to save time here is not generally advisable
@ -122,7 +128,8 @@ which takes quite a bit of time and thought after the "real work" has been
done. When done properly, though, it is time well spent.
5.4: PATCH FORMATTING AND CHANGELOGS
Patch formatting and changelogs
-------------------------------
So now you have a perfect series of patches for posting, but the work is
not done quite yet. Each patch needs to be formatted into a message which
@ -140,6 +147,8 @@ that end, each patch will be composed of the following:
subsystem name first, followed by the purpose of the patch. For
example:
::
gpio: fix build on CONFIG_GPIO_SYSFS=n
- A blank line followed by a detailed description of the contents of the
@ -192,6 +201,8 @@ been associated with the development of this patch. They are described in
detail in the SubmittingPatches document; what follows here is a brief
summary. Each of these lines has the format:
::
tag: Full Name <email address> optional-other-stuff
The tags in common use are:
@ -225,7 +236,8 @@ Be careful in the addition of tags to your patches: only Cc: is appropriate
for addition without the explicit permission of the person named.
5.5: SENDING THE PATCH
Sending the patch
-----------------
Before you mail your patches, there are a couple of other things you should
take care of:
@ -287,6 +299,8 @@ obvious maintainer, Andrew Morton is often the patch target of last resort.
Patches need good subject lines. The canonical format for a patch line is
something like:
::
[PATCH nn/mm] subsys: one-line description of the patch
where "nn" is the ordinal number of the patch, "mm" is the total number of

14
Documentation/development-process/6.Followthrough → Documentation/development-process/6.Followthrough.rst
View File

@ -1,4 +1,7 @@
6: FOLLOWTHROUGH
.. _development_followthrough:
Followthrough
=============
At this point, you have followed the guidelines given so far and, with the
addition of your own engineering skills, have posted a perfect series of
@ -16,7 +19,8 @@ standards. A failure to participate in this process is quite likely to
prevent the inclusion of your patches into the mainline.
6.1: WORKING WITH REVIEWERS
Working with reviewers
----------------------
A patch of any significance will result in a number of comments from other
developers as they review the code. Working with reviewers can be, for
@ -97,7 +101,8 @@ though, and not before all other alternatives have been explored. And bear
in mind, of course, that he may not agree with you either.
6.2: WHAT HAPPENS NEXT
What happens next
-----------------
If a patch is considered to be a good thing to add to the kernel, and once
most of the review issues have been resolved, the next step is usually
@ -177,7 +182,8 @@ it with the assumption that you will not be around to maintain it
afterward.
6.3: OTHER THINGS THAT CAN HAPPEN
Other things that can happen
-----------------------------
One day, you may open your mail client and see that somebody has mailed you
a patch to your code. That is one of the advantages of having your code

13
Documentation/development-process/7.AdvancedTopics → Documentation/development-process/7.AdvancedTopics.rst
View File

@ -1,11 +1,15 @@
7: ADVANCED TOPICS
.. _development_advancedtopics:
Advanced topics
===============
At this point, hopefully, you have a handle on how the development process
works. There is still more to learn, however! This section will cover a
number of topics which can be helpful for developers wanting to become a
regular part of the Linux kernel development process.
7.1: MANAGING PATCHES WITH GIT
Managing patches with git
-------------------------
The use of distributed version control for the kernel began in early 2002,
when Linus first started playing with the proprietary BitKeeper
@ -114,6 +118,8 @@ radar. Kernel developers tend to get unhappy when they see that kind of
thing happening; putting up a git tree with unreviewed or off-topic patches
can affect your ability to get trees pulled in the future. Quoting Linus:
::
You can send me patches, but for me to pull a git patch from you, I
need to know that you know what you're doing, and I need to be able
to trust things *without* then having to go and check every
@ -141,7 +147,8 @@ format the request as other developers expect, and will also check to be
sure that you have remembered to push those changes to the public server.
7.2: REVIEWING PATCHES
Reviewing patches
-----------------
Some readers will certainly object to putting this section with "advanced
topics" on the grounds that even beginning kernel developers should be

8
Documentation/development-process/8.Conclusion → Documentation/development-process/8.Conclusion.rst
View File

@ -1,4 +1,7 @@
8: FOR MORE INFORMATION
.. _development_conclusion:
For more information
====================
There are numerous sources of information on Linux kernel development and
related topics. First among those will always be the Documentation
@ -47,7 +50,8 @@ Documentation for git can be found at:
http://www.kernel.org/pub/software/scm/git/docs/user-manual.html
9: CONCLUSION
Conclusion
==========
Congratulations to anybody who has made it through this long-winded
document. Hopefully it has provided a helpful understanding of how the

10
Documentation/development-process/conf.py Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
# -*- coding: utf-8; mode: python -*-
project = 'Linux Kernel Development Documentation'
tags.add("subproject")
latex_documents = [
('index', 'development-process.tex', 'Linux Kernel Development Documentation',
'The kernel development community', 'manual'),
]

29
Documentation/development-process/development-process.rst Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
.. _development_process_main:
A guide to the Kernel Development Process
=========================================
Contents:
.. toctree::
:numbered:
:maxdepth: 2
1.Intro
2.Process
3.Early-stage
4.Coding
5.Posting
6.Followthrough
7.AdvancedTopics
8.Conclusion
The purpose of this document is to help developers (and their managers)
work with the development community with a minimum of frustration. It is
an attempt to document how this community works in a way which is
accessible to those who are not intimately familiar with Linux kernel
development (or, indeed, free software development in general). While
there is some technical material here, this is very much a process-oriented
discussion which does not require a deep knowledge of kernel programming to
understand.

9
Documentation/development-process/index.rst Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
Linux Kernel Development Documentation
======================================
Contents:
.. toctree::
:maxdepth: 2
development-process

98
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/altera/socfpga-eccmgr.txt
View File

@ -90,6 +90,47 @@ Required Properties:
- interrupts : Should be single bit error interrupt, then double bit error
interrupt, in this order.
NAND FIFO ECC
Required Properties:
- compatible : Should be "altr,socfpga-nand-ecc"
- reg : Address and size for ECC block registers.
- altr,ecc-parent : phandle to parent NAND node.
- interrupts : Should be single bit error interrupt, then double bit error
interrupt, in this order.
DMA FIFO ECC
Required Properties:
- compatible : Should be "altr,socfpga-dma-ecc"
- reg : Address and size for ECC block registers.
- altr,ecc-parent : phandle to parent DMA node.
- interrupts : Should be single bit error interrupt, then double bit error
interrupt, in this order.
USB FIFO ECC
Required Properties:
- compatible : Should be "altr,socfpga-usb-ecc"
- reg : Address and size for ECC block registers.
- altr,ecc-parent : phandle to parent USB node.
- interrupts : Should be single bit error interrupt, then double bit error
interrupt, in this order.
QSPI FIFO ECC
Required Properties:
- compatible : Should be "altr,socfpga-qspi-ecc"
- reg : Address and size for ECC block registers.
- altr,ecc-parent : phandle to parent QSPI node.
- interrupts : Should be single bit error interrupt, then double bit error
interrupt, in this order.
SDMMC FIFO ECC
Required Properties:
- compatible : Should be "altr,socfpga-sdmmc-ecc"
- reg : Address and size for ECC block registers.
- altr,ecc-parent : phandle to parent SD/MMC node.
- interrupts : Should be single bit error interrupt, then double bit error
interrupt, in this order for port A, and then single bit error interrupt,
then double bit error interrupt in this order for port B.
Example:
eccmgr: eccmgr@ffd06000 {
@ -132,4 +173,61 @@ Example:
interrupts = <5 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>,
<37 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
};
nand-buf-ecc@ff8c2000 {
compatible = "altr,socfpga-nand-ecc";
reg = <0xff8c2000 0x400>;
altr,ecc-parent = <&nand>;
interrupts = <11 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>,
<43 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
};
nand-rd-ecc@ff8c2400 {
compatible = "altr,socfpga-nand-ecc";
reg = <0xff8c2400 0x400>;
altr,ecc-parent = <&nand>;
interrupts = <13 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>,
<45 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
};
nand-wr-ecc@ff8c2800 {
compatible = "altr,socfpga-nand-ecc";
reg = <0xff8c2800 0x400>;
altr,ecc-parent = <&nand>;
interrupts = <12 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>,
<44 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
};
dma-ecc@ff8c8000 {
compatible = "altr,socfpga-dma-ecc";
reg = <0xff8c8000 0x400>;
altr,ecc-parent = <&pdma>;
interrupts = <10 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>,
<42 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
usb0-ecc@ff8c8800 {
compatible = "altr,socfpga-usb-ecc";
reg = <0xff8c8800 0x400>;
altr,ecc-parent = <&usb0>;
interrupts = <2 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>,
<34 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
};
qspi-ecc@ff8c8400 {
compatible = "altr,socfpga-qspi-ecc";
reg = <0xff8c8400 0x400>;
altr,ecc-parent = <&qspi>;
interrupts = <14 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>,
<46 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
};
sdmmc-ecc@ff8c2c00 {
compatible = "altr,socfpga-sdmmc-ecc";
reg = <0xff8c2c00 0x400>;
altr,ecc-parent = <&mmc>;
interrupts = <15 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>,
<47 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>,
<16 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>,
<48 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>;
};
};

4
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/bcm/brcm,bcm2835.txt
View File

@ -38,6 +38,10 @@ Raspberry Pi Compute Module
Required root node properties:
compatible = "raspberrypi,compute-module", "brcm,bcm2835";
Raspberry Pi Zero
Required root node properties:
compatible = "raspberrypi,model-zero", "brcm,bcm2835";
Generic BCM2835 board
Required root node properties:
compatible = "brcm,bcm2835";

4
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/davinci.txt
View File

@ -5,6 +5,10 @@ DA850/OMAP-L138/AM18x Evaluation Module (EVM) board
Required root node properties:
- compatible = "ti,da850-evm", "ti,da850";
DA850/OMAP-L138/AM18x L138/C6748 Development Kit (LCDK) board
Required root node properties:
- compatible = "ti,da850-lcdk", "ti,da850";
EnBW AM1808 based CMC board
Required root node properties:
- compatible = "enbw,cmc", "ti,da850;

39
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/hisilicon/hisilicon.txt
View File

@ -175,38 +175,55 @@ Example:
};
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Hisilicon HiP05 PCIe-SAS system controller
Hisilicon HiP05/HiP06 PCIe-SAS sub system controller
Required properties:
- compatible : "hisilicon,pcie-sas-subctrl", "syscon";
- reg : Register address and size
The HiP05 PCIe-SAS system controller is shared by PCIe and SAS controllers in
HiP05 Soc to implement some basic configurations.
The PCIe-SAS sub system controller is shared by PCIe and SAS controllers in
HiP05 or HiP06 Soc to implement some basic configurations.
Example:
/* for HiP05 PCIe-SAS system */
pcie_sas: system_controller@0xb0000000 {
/* for HiP05 PCIe-SAS sub system */
pcie_sas: system_controller@b0000000 {
compatible = "hisilicon,pcie-sas-subctrl", "syscon";
reg = <0xb0000000 0x10000>;
};
Hisilicon HiP05 PERISUB system controller
Hisilicon HiP05/HiP06 PERI sub system controller
Required properties:
- compatible : "hisilicon,hip05-perisubc", "syscon";
- compatible : "hisilicon,peri-subctrl", "syscon";
- reg : Register address and size
The HiP05 PERISUB system controller is shared by peripheral controllers in
HiP05 Soc to implement some basic configurations. The peripheral
The PERI sub system controller is shared by peripheral controllers in
HiP05 or HiP06 Soc to implement some basic configurations. The peripheral
controllers include mdio, ddr, iic, uart, timer and so on.
Example:
/* for HiP05 perisub-ctrl-c system */
/* for HiP05 sub peri system */
peri_c_subctrl: syscon@80000000 {
compatible = "hisilicon,hip05-perisubc", "syscon";
compatible = "hisilicon,peri-subctrl", "syscon";
reg = <0x0 0x80000000 0x0 0x10000>;
};
Hisilicon HiP05/HiP06 DSA sub system controller
Required properties:
- compatible : "hisilicon,dsa-subctrl", "syscon";
- reg : Register address and size
The DSA sub system controller is shared by peripheral controllers in
HiP05 or HiP06 Soc to implement some basic configurations.
Example:
/* for HiP05 dsa sub system */
pcie_sas: system_controller@a0000000 {
compatible = "hisilicon,dsa-subctrl", "syscon";
reg = <0xa0000000 0x10000>;
};
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Hisilicon CPU controller

15
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/marvell/armada-39x.txt
View File

@ -8,8 +8,19 @@ Required root node property:
- compatible: must contain "marvell,armada390"
In addition, boards using the Marvell Armada 398 SoC shall have the
following property before the previous one:
In addition, boards using the Marvell Armada 395 SoC shall have the
following property before the common "marvell,armada390" one:
Required root node property:
compatible: must contain "marvell,armada395"
Example:
compatible = "marvell,a395-gp", "marvell,armada395", "marvell,armada390";
Boards using the Marvell Armada 398 SoC shall have the following
property before the common "marvell,armada390" one:
Required root node property:

25
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/marvell/marvell,orion5x.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
Marvell Orion SoC Family Device Tree Bindings
---------------------------------------------
Boards with a SoC of the Marvell Orion family, eg 88f5181
* Required root node properties:
compatible: must contain "marvell,orion5x"
In addition, the above compatible shall be extended with the specific
SoC. Currently known SoC compatibles are:
"marvell,orion5x-88f5181"
"marvell,orion5x-88f5182"
And in addition, the compatible shall be extended with the specific
board. Currently known boards are:
"buffalo,lsgl"
"buffalo,lswsgl"
"buffalo,lswtgl"
"lacie,ethernet-disk-mini-v2"
"lacie,d2-network"
"marvell,rd-88f5182-nas"
"maxtor,shared-storage-2"
"netgear,wnr854t"

3
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,apmixedsys.txt
View File

@ -5,7 +5,8 @@ The Mediatek apmixedsys controller provides the PLLs to the system.
Required Properties:
- compatible: Should be:
- compatible: Should be one of:
- "mediatek,mt2701-apmixedsys"
- "mediatek,mt8135-apmixedsys"
- "mediatek,mt8173-apmixedsys"
- #clock-cells: Must be 1

22
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,bdpsys.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
Mediatek bdpsys controller
============================
The Mediatek bdpsys controller provides various clocks to the system.
Required Properties:
- compatible: Should be:
- "mediatek,mt2701-bdpsys", "syscon"
- #clock-cells: Must be 1
The bdpsys controller uses the common clk binding from
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
The available clocks are defined in dt-bindings/clock/mt*-clk.h.
Example:
bdpsys: clock-controller@1c000000 {
compatible = "mediatek,mt2701-bdpsys", "syscon";
reg = <0 0x1c000000 0 0x1000>;
#clock-cells = <1>;
};

22
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,ethsys.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
Mediatek ethsys controller
============================
The Mediatek ethsys controller provides various clocks to the system.
Required Properties:
- compatible: Should be:
- "mediatek,mt2701-ethsys", "syscon"
- #clock-cells: Must be 1
The ethsys controller uses the common clk binding from
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
The available clocks are defined in dt-bindings/clock/mt*-clk.h.
Example:
ethsys: clock-controller@1b000000 {
compatible = "mediatek,mt2701-ethsys", "syscon";
reg = <0 0x1b000000 0 0x1000>;
#clock-cells = <1>;
};

24
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,hifsys.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
Mediatek hifsys controller
============================
The Mediatek hifsys controller provides various clocks and reset
outputs to the system.
Required Properties:
- compatible: Should be:
- "mediatek,mt2701-hifsys", "syscon"
- #clock-cells: Must be 1
The hifsys controller uses the common clk binding from
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/clock-bindings.txt
The available clocks are defined in dt-bindings/clock/mt*-clk.h.
Example:
hifsys: clock-controller@1a000000 {
compatible = "mediatek,mt2701-hifsys", "syscon";
reg = <0 0x1a000000 0 0x1000>;
#clock-cells = <1>;
#reset-cells = <1>;
};

3
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,imgsys.txt
View File

@ -5,7 +5,8 @@ The Mediatek imgsys controller provides various clocks to the system.
Required Properties:
- compatible: Should be:
- compatible: Should be one of:
- "mediatek,mt2701-imgsys", "syscon"
- "mediatek,mt8173-imgsys", "syscon"
- #clock-cells: Must be 1

3
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,infracfg.txt
View File

@ -6,7 +6,8 @@ outputs to the system.
Required Properties:
- compatible: Should be:
- compatible: Should be one of:
- "mediatek,mt2701-infracfg", "syscon"
- "mediatek,mt8135-infracfg", "syscon"
- "mediatek,mt8173-infracfg", "syscon"
- #clock-cells: Must be 1

3
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,mmsys.txt
View File

@ -5,7 +5,8 @@ The Mediatek mmsys controller provides various clocks to the system.
Required Properties:
- compatible: Should be:
- compatible: Should be one of:
- "mediatek,mt2701-mmsys", "syscon"
- "mediatek,mt8173-mmsys", "syscon"
- #clock-cells: Must be 1

3
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,pericfg.txt
View File

@ -6,7 +6,8 @@ outputs to the system.
Required Properties:
- compatible: Should be:
- compatible: Should be one of:
- "mediatek,mt2701-pericfg", "syscon"
- "mediatek,mt8135-pericfg", "syscon"
- "mediatek,mt8173-pericfg", "syscon"
- #clock-cells: Must be 1

3
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,topckgen.txt
View File

@ -5,7 +5,8 @@ The Mediatek topckgen controller provides various clocks to the system.
Required Properties:
- compatible: Should be:
- compatible: Should be one of:
- "mediatek,mt2701-topckgen"
- "mediatek,mt8135-topckgen"
- "mediatek,mt8173-topckgen"
- #clock-cells: Must be 1

3
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/mediatek/mediatek,vdecsys.txt
View File

@ -5,7 +5,8 @@ The Mediatek vdecsys controller provides various clocks to the system.
Required Properties:
- compatible: Should be:
- compatible: Should be one of:
- "mediatek,mt2701-vdecsys", "syscon"
- "mediatek,mt8173-vdecsys", "syscon"
- #clock-cells: Must be 1

6
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/omap/omap.txt
View File

@ -180,3 +180,9 @@ Boards:
- DRA722 EVM: Software Development Board for DRA722
compatible = "ti,dra72-evm", "ti,dra722", "ti,dra72", "ti,dra7"
- DM3730 Logic PD Torpedo + Wireless: Commercial System on Module with WiFi and Bluetooth
compatible = "logicpd,dm3730-torpedo-devkit", "ti,omap3630", "ti,omap3"
- DM3730 Logic PD SOM-LV: Commercial System on Module with WiFi and Bluetooth
compatible = "logicpd,dm3730-som-lv-devkit", "ti,omap3630", "ti,omap3"

12
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/rockchip.txt
View File

@ -31,6 +31,10 @@ Rockchip platforms device tree bindings
or
- compatible = "firefly,firefly-rk3288-beta", "rockchip,rk3288";
- Firefly Firefly-RK3288 Reload board:
Required root node properties:
- compatible = "firefly,firefly-rk3288-reload", "rockchip,rk3288";
- ChipSPARK PopMetal-RK3288 board:
Required root node properties:
- compatible = "chipspark,popmetal-rk3288", "rockchip,rk3288";
@ -110,6 +114,14 @@ Rockchip platforms device tree bindings
- Rockchip RK3229 Evaluation board:
- compatible = "rockchip,rk3229-evb", "rockchip,rk3229";
- Rockchip RK3288 Fennec board:
Required root node properties:
- compatible = "rockchip,rk3288-fennec", "rockchip,rk3288";
- Rockchip RK3399 evb:
Required root node properties:
- compatible = "rockchip,rk3399-evb", "rockchip,rk3399";
- Tronsmart Orion R68 Meta
Required root node properties:
- compatible = "tronsmart,orion-r68-meta", "rockchip,rk3368";

1
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/pmu.txt
View File

@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ Properties:
- "samsung,exynos5260-pmu" - for Exynos5260 SoC.
- "samsung,exynos5410-pmu" - for Exynos5410 SoC,
- "samsung,exynos5420-pmu" - for Exynos5420 SoC.
- "samsung,exynos5433-pmu" - for Exynos5433 SoC.
- "samsung,exynos7-pmu" - for Exynos7 SoC.
second value must be always "syscon".

6
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/shmobile.txt
View File

@ -49,6 +49,8 @@ Boards:
compatible = "renesas,genmai", "renesas,r7s72100"
- Gose
compatible = "renesas,gose", "renesas,r8a7793"
- H3ULCB (RTP0RC7795SKB00010S)
compatible = "renesas,h3ulcb", "renesas,r8a7795";
- Henninger
compatible = "renesas,henninger", "renesas,r8a7791"
- Koelsch (RTP0RC7791SEB00010S)
@ -63,9 +65,13 @@ Boards:
compatible = "renesas,marzen", "renesas,r8a7779"
- Porter (M2-LCDP)
compatible = "renesas,porter", "renesas,r8a7791"
- RSKRZA1 (YR0K77210C000BE)
compatible = "renesas,rskrza1", "renesas,r7s72100"
- Salvator-X (RTP0RC7795SIPB0010S)
compatible = "renesas,salvator-x", "renesas,r8a7795";
- Salvator-X
compatible = "renesas,salvator-x", "renesas,r8a7796";
- SILK (RTP0RC7794LCB00011S)
compatible = "renesas,silk", "renesas,r8a7794"
- Wheat
compatible = "renesas,wheat", "renesas,r8a7792"

1
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/sunxi.txt
View File

@ -14,3 +14,4 @@ using one of the following compatible strings:
allwinner,sun8i-a83t
allwinner,sun8i-h3
allwinner,sun9i-a80
nextthing,gr8

6
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/technologic.txt
View File

@ -4,3 +4,9 @@ Technologic Systems Platforms Device Tree Bindings
TS-4800 board
Required root node properties:
- compatible = "technologic,imx51-ts4800", "fsl,imx51";
TS-4900 is a System-on-Module based on the Freescale i.MX6 System-on-Chip.
It can be mounted on a carrier board providing additional peripheral connectors.
Required root node properties:
- compatible = "technologic,imx6dl-ts4900", "fsl,imx6dl"
- compatible = "technologic,imx6q-ts4900", "fsl,imx6q"

24
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/zte.txt
View File

@ -13,3 +13,27 @@ Low power management required properties:
Bus matrix required properties:
- compatible = "zte,zx-bus-matrix"
---------------------------------------
- ZX296718 SoC:
Required root node properties:
- compatible = "zte,zx296718"
ZX296718 EVB board:
- "zte,zx296718-evb"
System management required properties:
- compatible = "zte,zx296718-aon-sysctrl"
- compatible = "zte,zx296718-sysctrl"
Example:
aon_sysctrl: aon-sysctrl@116000 {
compatible = "zte,zx296718-aon-sysctrl", "syscon";
reg = <0x116000 0x1000>;
};
sysctrl: sysctrl@1463000 {
compatible = "zte,zx296718-sysctrl", "syscon";
reg = <0x1463000 0x1000>;
};

17
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/auxdisplay/img-ascii-lcd.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
Binding for ASCII LCD displays on Imagination Technologies boards
Required properties:
- compatible : should be one of:
"img,boston-lcd"
"mti,malta-lcd"
"mti,sead3-lcd"
Required properties for "img,boston-lcd":
- reg : memory region locating the device registers
Required properties for "mti,malta-lcd" or "mti,sead3-lcd":
- regmap: phandle of the system controller containing the LCD registers
- offset: offset in bytes to the LCD registers within the system controller
The layout of the registers & properties of the display are determined
from the compatible string, making this binding somewhat trivial.

138
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/bus/qcom,ebi2.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,138 @@
Qualcomm External Bus Interface 2 (EBI2)
The EBI2 contains two peripheral blocks: XMEM and LCDC. The XMEM handles any
external memory (such as NAND or other memory-mapped peripherals) whereas
LCDC handles LCD displays.
As it says it connects devices to an external bus interface, meaning address
lines (up to 9 address lines so can only address 1KiB external memory space),
data lines (16 bits), OE (output enable), ADV (address valid, used on some
NOR flash memories), WE (write enable). This on top of 6 different chip selects
(CS0 thru CS5) so that in theory 6 different devices can be connected.
Apparently this bus is clocked at 64MHz. It has dedicated pins on the package
and the bus can only come out on these pins, however if some of the pins are
unused they can be left unconnected or remuxed to be used as GPIO or in some
cases other orthogonal functions as well.
Also CS1 and CS2 has -A and -B signals. Why they have that is unclear to me.
The chip selects have the following memory range assignments. This region of
memory is referred to as "Chip Peripheral SS FPB0" and is 168MB big.
Chip Select Physical address base
CS0 GPIO134 0x1a800000-0x1b000000 (8MB)
CS1 GPIO39 (A) / GPIO123 (B) 0x1b000000-0x1b800000 (8MB)
CS2 GPIO40 (A) / GPIO124 (B) 0x1b800000-0x1c000000 (8MB)
CS3 GPIO133 0x1d000000-0x25000000 (128 MB)
CS4 GPIO132 0x1c800000-0x1d000000 (8MB)
CS5 GPIO131 0x1c000000-0x1c800000 (8MB)
The APQ8060 Qualcomm Application Processor User Guide, 80-N7150-14 Rev. A,
August 6, 2012 contains some incomplete documentation of the EBI2.
FIXME: the manual mentions "write precharge cycles" and "precharge cycles".
We have not been able to figure out which bit fields these correspond to
in the hardware, or what valid values exist. The current hypothesis is that
this is something just used on the FAST chip selects and that the SLOW
chip selects are understood fully. There is also a "byte device enable"
flag somewhere for 8bit memories.
FIXME: The chipselects have SLOW and FAST configuration registers. It's a bit
unclear what this means, if they are mutually exclusive or can be used
together, or if some chip selects are hardwired to be FAST and others are SLOW
by design.
The XMEM registers are totally undocumented but could be partially decoded
because the Cypress AN49576 Antioch Westbridge apparently has suspiciously
similar register layout, see: http://www.cypress.com/file/105771/download
Required properties:
- compatible: should be one of:
"qcom,msm8660-ebi2"
"qcom,apq8060-ebi2"
- #address-cells: shoule be <2>: the first cell is the chipselect,
the second cell is the offset inside the memory range
- #size-cells: should be <1>
- ranges: should be set to:
ranges = <0 0x0 0x1a800000 0x00800000>,
<1 0x0 0x1b000000 0x00800000>,
<2 0x0 0x1b800000 0x00800000>,
<3 0x0 0x1d000000 0x08000000>,
<4 0x0 0x1c800000 0x00800000>,
<5 0x0 0x1c000000 0x00800000>;
- reg: two ranges of registers: EBI2 config and XMEM config areas
- reg-names: should be "ebi2", "xmem"
- clocks: two clocks, EBI_2X and EBI
- clock-names: shoule be "ebi2x", "ebi2"
Optional subnodes:
- Nodes inside the EBI2 will be considered device nodes.
The following optional properties are properties that can be tagged onto
any device subnode. We are assuming that there can be only ONE device per
chipselect subnode, else the properties will become ambigous.
Optional properties arrays for SLOW chip selects:
- qcom,xmem-recovery-cycles: recovery cycles is the time the memory continues to
drive the data bus after OE is de-asserted, in order to avoid contention on
the data bus. They are inserted when reading one CS and switching to another
CS or read followed by write on the same CS. Valid values 0 thru 15. Minimum
value is actually 1, so a value of 0 will still yield 1 recovery cycle.
- qcom,xmem-write-hold-cycles: write hold cycles, these are extra cycles
inserted after every write minimum 1. The data out is driven from the time
WE is asserted until CS is asserted. With a hold of 1 (value = 0), the CS
stays active for 1 extra cycle etc. Valid values 0 thru 15.
- qcom,xmem-write-delta-cycles: initial latency for write cycles inserted for
the first write to a page or burst memory. Valid values 0 thru 255.
- qcom,xmem-read-delta-cycles: initial latency for read cycles inserted for the
first read to a page or burst memory. Valid values 0 thru 255.
- qcom,xmem-write-wait-cycles: number of wait cycles for every write access, 0=1
cycle. Valid values 0 thru 15.
- qcom,xmem-read-wait-cycles: number of wait cycles for every read access, 0=1
cycle. Valid values 0 thru 15.
Optional properties arrays for FAST chip selects:
- qcom,xmem-address-hold-enable: this is a boolean property stating that we
shall hold the address for an extra cycle to meet hold time requirements
with ADV assertion.
- qcom,xmem-adv-to-oe-recovery-cycles: the number of cycles elapsed before an OE
assertion, with respect to the cycle where ADV (address valid) is asserted.
2 means 2 cycles between ADV and OE. Valid values 0, 1, 2 or 3.
- qcom,xmem-read-hold-cycles: the length in cycles of the first segment of a
read transfer. For a single read trandfer this will be the time from CS
assertion to OE assertion. Valid values 0 thru 15.
Example:
ebi2@1a100000 {
compatible = "qcom,apq8060-ebi2";
#address-cells = <2>;
#size-cells = <1>;
ranges = <0 0x0 0x1a800000 0x00800000>,
<1 0x0 0x1b000000 0x00800000>,
<2 0x0 0x1b800000 0x00800000>,
<3 0x0 0x1d000000 0x08000000>,
<4 0x0 0x1c800000 0x00800000>,
<5 0x0 0x1c000000 0x00800000>;
reg = <0x1a100000 0x1000>, <0x1a110000 0x1000>;
reg-names = "ebi2", "xmem";
clocks = <&gcc EBI2_2X_CLK>, <&gcc EBI2_CLK>;
clock-names = "ebi2x", "ebi2";
/* Make sure to set up the pin control for the EBI2 */
pinctrl-names = "default";
pinctrl-0 = <&foo_ebi2_pins>;
foo-ebi2@2,0 {
compatible = "foo";
reg = <2 0x0 0x100>;
(...)
qcom,xmem-recovery-cycles = <0>;
qcom,xmem-write-hold-cycles = <3>;
qcom,xmem-write-delta-cycles = <31>;
qcom,xmem-read-delta-cycles = <28>;
qcom,xmem-write-wait-cycles = <9>;
qcom,xmem-read-wait-cycles = <9>;
};
};

45
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/amlogic,gxbb-aoclkc.txt Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
* Amlogic GXBB AO Clock and Reset Unit
The Amlogic GXBB AO clock controller generates and supplies clock to various
controllers within the Always-On part of the SoC.
Required Properties:
- compatible: should be "amlogic,gxbb-aoclkc"
- reg: physical base address of the clock controller and length of memory
mapped region.
- #clock-cells: should be 1.
Each clock is assigned an identifier and client nodes can use this identifier
to specify the clock which they consume. All available clocks are defined as
preprocessor macros in the dt-bindings/clock/gxbb-aoclkc.h header and can be
used in device tree sources.
- #reset-cells: should be 1.
Each reset is assigned an identifier and client nodes can use this identifier
to specify the reset which they consume. All available resets are defined as
preprocessor macros in the dt-bindings/reset/gxbb-aoclkc.h header and can be
used in device tree sources.
Example: AO Clock controller node:
clkc_AO: clock-controller@040 {
compatible = "amlogic,gxbb-aoclkc";
reg = <0x0 0x040 0x0 0x4>;
#clock-cells = <1>;
#reset-cells = <1>;
};
Example: UART controller node that consumes the clock and reset generated
by the clock controller:
uart_AO: serial@4c0 {
compatible = "amlogic,meson-uart";
reg = <0x4c0 0x14>;
interrupts = <0 90 1>;
clocks = <&clkc_AO CLKID_AO_UART1>;
resets = <&clkc_AO RESET_AO_UART1>;
status = "disabled";
};

34
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/clock/arm-syscon-icst.txt
View File

@ -5,20 +5,50 @@ Technology (IDT). ARM integrated these oscillators deeply into their
reference designs by adding special control registers that manage such
oscillators to their system controllers.
The ARM system controller contains logic to serialize and initialize
The various ARM system controllers contain logic to serialize and initialize
an ICST clock request after a write to the 32 bit register at an offset
into the system controller. Furthermore, to even be able to alter one of
these frequencies, the system controller must first be unlocked by
writing a special token to another offset in the system controller.
Some ARM hardware contain special versions of the serial interface that only
connects the low 8 bits of the VDW (missing one bit), hardwires RDW to
different values and sometimes also hardwire the output divider. They
therefore have special compatible strings as per this table (the OD value is
the value on the pins, not the resulting output divider):
Hardware variant: RDW OD VDW
Integrator/AP 22 1 Bit 8 0, rest variable
integratorap-cm
Integrator/AP 46 3 Bit 8 0, rest variable
integratorap-sys
Integrator/AP 22 or 1 17 or (33 or 25 MHz)
integratorap-pci 14 1 14
Integrator/CP 22 variable Bit 8 0, rest variable
integratorcp-cm-core
Integrator/CP 22 variable Bit 8 0, rest variable
integratorcp-cm-mem
The ICST oscillator must be provided inside a system controller node.
Required properties:
- compatible: must be one of
"arm,syscon-icst525"
"arm,syscon-icst307"
"arm,syscon-icst525-integratorap-cm"
"arm,syscon-icst525-integratorap-sys"
"arm,syscon-icst525-integratorap-pci"
"arm,syscon-icst525-integratorcp-cm-core"
"arm,syscon-icst525-integratorcp-cm-mem"
- lock-offset: the offset address into the system controller where the
unlocking register is located
- vco-offset: the offset address into the system controller where the
ICST control register is located (even 32 bit address)
- compatible: must be one of "arm,syscon-icst525" or "arm,syscon-icst307"
- #clock-cells: must be <0>
- clocks: parent clock, since the ICST needs a parent clock to derive its
frequency from, this attribute is compulsory.

Some files were not shown because too many files have changed in this diff Show More